2017 FIAT 500X Owner`s Manual

2017 FIAT 500X Owner`s Manual
2017 FIAT ® 500X
2017
17FB-126-AE
©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
FIAT is a registered trademark of FCA Group
Marketing S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC.
OWNER’S MANUAL
Fifth Edition Rev 1
Printed in U.S.A.
FIAT 500X
®
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name
FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2017 FCA US LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4
5
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
5
6
SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
6
7
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
7
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
8
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
9
10
TECHNICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
10
11
MULTIMEDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
11
12
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
12
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
䡵 ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
1
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be
assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of
your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various customer-oriented documents. Please
take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this
manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of
your vehicle.
The enclosed Warranty Information lists the services
that FCA US LLC offers to its customers:
• The Warranty with terms and conditions for maintaining its validity
• The range of additional services available to FCA US
LLC customers
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factorytrained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and
cares about your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which
section contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
INTRODUCTION 5
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner’s Manual:
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
ROLLOVER WARNING
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage
to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s
Manual, you may miss important information. Observe
all Warnings and Cautions.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing
better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven
in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control.
Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is
out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles
may not.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety
and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.
INTRODUCTION 7
1
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts
provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In
fact, the U.S. government notes that the universal use of
existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by
10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling
injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than
a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . .10
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Prepare A List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .13
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C..13
▫ FIAT Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ FIAT Canada Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .11
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands . . . . . . . .11
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to bring
the right papers with you, as well as your warranty
folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by
the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history, as this can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let
the service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental,
it is advisable to make these arrangements when you
call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be
happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high
quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer
have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special
tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is
fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to
the general manager or owner of the authorized
dealer. They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 11
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer
center should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FIAT Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: 1-888-242-6342
FIAT Canada Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Tel.: (888) 242-6342
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
2
12 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the
mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If
you have any questions about the service contract, call
the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract.
It is not responsible for any service contract other than
the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service
contract, and you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer
to the contract documents, and contact the person listed
in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with
their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or
related concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects, or other reproductive harm.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 13
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC and FCA Canada Inc.
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that
could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems between you, your
authorized dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-4249153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue,
SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehicle
2
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect,
you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to
report a safety defect to the Canadian government
should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle
Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510
or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are
accepted.
14 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC
vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Or
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and
fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems
and features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic
tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
• www.techauthority.com
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
CONTENTS
䡵 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . .16
▫ INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ FRONT VIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ INTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ REAR VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
3
16 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
FRONT VIEW
Front View
1 — Engine Compartment
2 — Headlights
3 — Windshield
4 — Outside Mirrors
5 — Doors
6 — Wheels
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 17
REAR VIEW
3
Rear View
1 — Rear Lights
2 — Rear Windshield Wiper
3 — Liftgate
18 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
— Air Vents
— Multifunction Lever
— Instrument Cluster
— Speed Controls
— Windshield Wiper Lever
— Uconnect Radio
7 — Upper Switch Bank
8 — Upper Storage Compartment
9 — Passenger Front Air Bag
10 — Air Vents
11 — Lower Storage/Glove Compartment
12 — Climate Controls
13
14
15
16
17
18
—
—
—
—
—
—
Lower Switch Bank
Driver Side Knee Air Bag
Ignition
Driver Side Front Air Bag
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
Headlight Switch
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 19
INTERIOR
3
Interior Features
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Power Window Switches
Headlight Switch
Instrument Cluster
Uconnect Radio
Glove Compartment
6 — Seats
7 — Climate Controls
8 — Transmission Gear Selector (Automatic/Manual Options)
9 — Electronic Speed Controls
10 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Electronic Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Key Fob Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob With
Remote Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ Request For Additional Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 4
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Remote Start Comfort Systems — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer
Activation — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
䡵 IGNITION SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
䡵 SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped . .32
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM. . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
▫ Disabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
▫ Manual Locking/Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
▫ Central Lock/Unlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ Auto Dimming Mirror — If Equipped. . . . . . .60
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .62
▫ Child Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
▫ Manual Adjustment Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . .48
▫ Power Adjustment Front Seats — If Equipped .49
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
▫ Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
䡵 HEAD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
▫ Front Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
▫ Rear Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
䡵 STEERING WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
▫ Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . .57
▫ Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped . . . . . .58
▫ Rear Cross Path (RCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ Mode Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Blind Spot Monitoring Fault Warnings . . . . . .69
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
䡵 EXTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
▫ Automatic Lighting — If Equipped . . . . . . . .70
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .71
▫ Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
▫ Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
▫ Automatic Climate Control Overview . . . . . . .88
▫ High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
䡵 INTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
▫ Driver’s Door Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
▫ Front Courtesy Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .102 4
▫ Rear Dome Light — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .76
▫ Opening The Sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
▫ Cargo Area Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
▫ Closing The Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
▫ Instrument Panel Dimmer And Ambient
Light Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
䡵 WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
▫ Front Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
▫ Rain Sensor — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
▫ Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped . . . .82
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
▫ Air Outlet And Diffuser Locations — Passenger
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
▫ Manual Climate Controls Overview . . . . . . . .84
▫ Sun Shade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
▫ Anti-Pinch Safety Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
▫ Emergency Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
▫ Power Sunroof Relearn Procedure . . . . . . . . .105
䡵 HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
▫ Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
▫ Closing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
▫ Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Closing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Ashtray — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
▫ Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Front Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
䡵 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
▫ Glove Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Grab Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
▫ Sun Visors “Slide-On-Rod” . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . .119
▫ Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
▫ Cigar Lighter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .115
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
KEYS
Electronic Key Fob
On versions equipped with ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go,⬙ the
car is equipped with an electronic key fob.
The key fob with Remote Control contains a Remote
Keyless Entry key fob. The Remote Keyless Entry
system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a handheld key fob.
The key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle
to activate the system.
NOTE: In the ON/RUN position, the trunk release
button is disabled. Only the unlock button is enabled.
4
Keyless Enter-N-Go Key Fob
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Door Lock Button
Remote Start Button
Panic Button
Emergency Key
Door Unlock Button
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once
to unlock the driver’s door or twice within five seconds
to unlock all doors and the liftgate. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Feature
Emergency Key Release/Removal
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
Key Fob Operation
Unlocking Doors And Liftgate
The driver’s door may be unlocked by inserting the
vehicle key into the exterior driver’s door lock cylinder.
To unlock all the doors, push the interior power door
unlock button on the door panel.
This feature lets you program the system to unlock
either the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of
the unlock button on the key fob. To change the current
setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry,
refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Getting To Know
Your Vehicle” for further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
Locking Doors And Liftgate
NOTE:
The doors may be locked by inserting the vehicle key
into the exterior driver’s door lock cylinder.
• The current setting can be changed within the instrument cluster display menu or in the Uconnect Settings so that the system will allow/inhibit the ability
to lock the doors when one or more of them are open.
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock
all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash
and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Settings in the radio can change to lights only, chirp
only, or both.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
Key Fob With Remote Control And Integrated Vehicle
Key
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is open, the
doors will lock when you push the lock button on the
key fob. This is signaled by a quick flash of the turn
signals.
Vehicles With Keyless Enter-N-Go
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is open, the
doors will lock when you push the lock button on the
key fob. The doors will unlock again only if the key is
inside the passenger compartment.
• Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To 4
Know Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob With
Remote Control
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the
back housing or the printed circuit board.
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Separating Keyless Enter-N-Go Key Fob Case
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch on the back of the key fob sideways with
your thumb. Then, pull the key out with your other
hand.
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on
a solid surface such as a table or similar surface.
Then, replace the battery.
2. Separating key fob halves requires screw removal (if
equipped) and gently prying the two halves of the
key fob apart with the emergency key. Make sure not
to damage the seal during removal.
When replacing the battery, match the + sign on the
battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip,
located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new
battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery
deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
Separating Keyless Enter-N-Go Key Fob Case
Keyless Enter-N-Go Battery
To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together and insert the emergency key.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
Request For Additional Keys
General Information
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
CAUTION!
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
— Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in the OFF mode.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a
blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
4
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
IGNITION SWITCH
Operation
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The keyless
ignition system consists of a Remote Keyless Entry key
fob with a Keyless Push Button Ignition.
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Electronic Key
This Keyless Enter-N-Go system feature allows the
driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a
button as long as the key fob is in the passenger
compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has three operating
positions. The three positions are STOP, RUN, and
START.
NOTE: If the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead
battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used
to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side
opposite of the emergency key) of the key fob against
the ENGINE START/STOP button and push to operate
the ignition switch.
Engine Start Stop Button
The Keyless Push Button Ignition can be placed in the
following positions:
OFF
• The engine is stopped.
• No electrical devices are available.
ON
• The vehicle is not running.
• Some electrical devices are available.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
RUN
WARNING! (Continued)
• Driving position.
• All the electrical devices are available.
NOTE: The vehicle will not start if the key fob is located
inside the cargo area and the liftgate is opened.
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation. Always remove
the key from the ignition and lock all doors when
leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE: Refer to ⬙Starting the Engine⬙ in ⬙Starting And
Operating⬙ for further information.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
4
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote
start prematurely:
• Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
This system uses the key fob to start the
engine conveniently from outside the vehicle
while still maintaining security. The system
has a range of 328 ft (100 m).
The Remote Starting System also activates the Climate
Control and (if equipped) the optional heated seats and
optional heated steering wheel depending on temperatures outside and inside the car.
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range.
• Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
• Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Cancelled — Liftgate Open
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
• Remote Start Cancelled — Too Cold
• Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
The message will stay active until the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Gear Selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
• Liftgate closed
To Enter Remote Start Mode
• Hazard switch off
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
Push and release the remote start button on
the key fob twice within five seconds. The
vehicle doors will lock, the turn signals will
flash, and the horn will chirp twice. Then, the 4
engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
• Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
NOTE:
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• PANIC button not pushed
• Ignition in STOP/OFF position
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• Fuel level meets minimum requirement
• Vehicle security alarm is not signaling an intrusion
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
remote start mode.
WARNING!
• For security, power window operation is disabled
when the vehicle is in the remote start mode.
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of
the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or
other controls could cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the remote start button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable with a one time push of the remote start
button for two seconds after receiving a valid remote
start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors and
disarm the vehicle security alarm (if equipped). Then,
prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle, for vehicles
equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go feature, push
and release the keyless ignition button.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Keyless EnterN-Go feature, the message “Remote Start Active —
Push Start Button” will display in the instrument cluster display until you push the keyless ignition button.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When Remote Start is activated, the heated steering
wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather. These features will stay on
through the duration of remote start or until the ignition
switch is cycled to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and deactivated through the Uconnect Settings.
For more information on Remote Start Comfort System
operation, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia.”
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer
Activation — If Equipped
When remote start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 40° F (4.4° C), the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will be enabled. Exiting Remote Start will
resume previous operation, except if the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer is active. The Windshield Wiper De-Icer
timer and operation will continue.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is
locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob with a Keyless Push Button
Ignition, and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that are
programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the
engine to crank if an invalid key fob tries to start the
engine.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, if 4
there is a problem with the system, the vehicle security
light will turn on. This condition will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
• Do not make modifications or alterations to the
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations
to the immobilization system may result in a loss
of security protection.
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting
systems. Use of these systems may result in
vehicle starting problems and loss of security
protection.
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
If something triggers the alarm, the vehicle security
alarm will provide the following audible and visible
signals:
• Horn will pulse.
• Park lamps and/or turn signals will flash.
• Vehicle security light in the instrument cluster will
flash.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and if the ignition switch is
cycled to the ON/RUN position without a valid key.
While the vehicle security alarm is armed, interior
switches for door locks and liftgate release are disabled.
Vehicle Security Light Location
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the
STOP/OFF position (refer to ⬙Starting The Engine⬙ in
⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push lock on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the
same exterior zone (for further information, refer to
⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know Your
Vehicle”).
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
NOTE:
• If a second chime is heard after approximately four
seconds from arming the alarm, disarm the alarm
by pushing the unlock button. Check for the correct
closure of doors and liftgate, then reactivate the
system by following steps 1 and 2.
4
• If a second chime is heard after approximately four
seconds from arming the alarm, even with the
doors and liftgate properly closed, a fault may have
occurred during the arming operation. If this occurs, contact your authorized dealer.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle with a
valid key fob available in the same exterior zone (if
equipped). Refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙ in ⬙Getting
To Know Your Vehicle⬙ for further information.
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the STOP/
OFF/LOCK position.
– For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
push the Keyless Enter-N-Go START/STOP button (requires at least one valid key fob in the
vehicle).
Disabling
To completely disable the alarm (e.g. in the case of long
inactivity of the car), lock the doors by turning the
vehicle key in the exterior door lock cylinder.
NOTE:
NOTE: If the batteries in the key fob discharge in the
event of a failure to the system, or to switch off the
alarm, place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
• The driver’s door key cylinder cannot arm or disarm
the vehicle security alarm.
DOORS
• When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the
doors.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the
previously described arming sequences has occurred,
the vehicle security alarm will arm regardless of
whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in
the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected.
Manual Locking/Unlocking
To lock each door from the inside, rotate the door lock
button on each door trim panel forward. To unlock the
doors from the inside, pull the inside door handle to the
first detent or rotate the door lock button until the lock
symbol is no longer visible.
If the lock symbol is visible when the door is shut, the
door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
WARNING! (Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
Manual Lock/Unlock Switch
1 — Door Unlocked
2 — Door Locked
NOTE: The manual lock knob unlocks each individual
door separately.
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation. Always remove
the key from the ignition and lock all doors when
leaving the vehicle unattended.
4
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Central Lock/Unlock
A power door lock switch is located on each of the front
door trim panels. This switch is used to lock or unlock
the doors and liftgate.
Locking/Unlocking From The Inside
Push the lock button on the driver or passenger door
trim panel to lock the doors.
With the doors locked, push the unlock button to
unlock the doors.
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry) system if equipped.
For further information, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go”
in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle.”
If you push the power door lock switch while the
ignition is in the ON/RUN position, and any front door
is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents
you from accidentally locking the key in the vehicle.
Placing the ignition in the STOP/OFF/LOCK position
or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a
door is open, and the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position, a chime will sound as a reminder to remove
the key.
NOTE: If all of the doors are closed properly, the door
locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s speed
exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h). Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Keyless Enter-N-Go
Power Lock/Unlock Switch
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of
Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to lock and
unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the
key fob lock or unlock buttons.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
NOTE:
• Passive Entry can be enabled or disabled. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle,
the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a
slower response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry Door
Handle, and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and if equipped, the security
alarm will arm.
• The key fob may not be able to be detected by the
vehicle keyless-go system if it is located next to a
mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these
devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal and
prevent the keyless-go system from starting the vehicle.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
the driver’s door handle, grab the front driver door
handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
4
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed,
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
the passenger door handle, grab the front passenger
door handle to unlock all four doors and the liftgate
automatically.
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fob within 5
ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles,
push the door handle lock button to lock all four doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE: The Passive Entry system will not operate if the
key fob battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the lock
button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key
Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive
Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
is in the OFF position.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with Passive
Entry. There are three situations that trigger a FOBIKSafe search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
• A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key
fob while a door is ajar.
• A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is ajar.
• A lock request is made by the door panel switch
while the door is ajar.
When any of these situations occur, after all ajar doors
are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
finds a Passive Entry key fob inside the car, and it does
not find any Passive Entry key fobs outside the car, then
the car will unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the
vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry key fob is detected
outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the
doors when any of the following conditions are met:
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock 4
knobs.
• There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the
vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry
door handle.
Emergency Unlocking Driver Door
If the Remote Keyless Entry key fob battery is low or
dead, the emergency key can be used to unlock the
driver side door lock cylinder.
To release the emergency key, proceed as follows:
1. Slide the emergency key release button to the side.
2. Remove the emergency key from the key fob with
remote control housing.
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
number of reasons. A child or others could be
severely injured or killed. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal, or the gear selector. Do not leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter- N-Go in
the ON/RUN mode. A child could start the vehicle, operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause them to be severely injured or killed.
Emergency Key Release
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
NOTE: The Emergency Key can be inserted into the
door lock cylinder in either direction.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
(Continued)
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry
key fob within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the
Electronic Liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
NOTE: The liftgate Passive Entry lock button will only
lock the liftgate. The liftgate unlock feature is built into
the electronic liftgate release.
4
Electronic Liftgate Release Button
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
in the instrument cluster display, if equipped, all doors
will unlock when you push the Electronic Release. If
⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st Press⬙ is programmed in
Uconnect, the liftgate will unlock when you push the
electronic lock/unlock button on the liftgate. For further information, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia.”
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 3 ft (1.0 m) of
the liftgate, push the Passive Entry lock button located
to the right of electronic liftgate release.
Liftgate Passive Entry Lock Button
Activation/Deactivation Of Keyless Enter-N-Go
Keyless Enter-N-Go can be activated or deactivated
through the instrument cluster display or through the
Uconnect system.
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade
screwdriver (or ignition key) and rotate the dial to the
lock or unlock position. When the system on a door is
engaged, that door can only be opened by using the
outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Child Locks
To provide a safer environment for small children
riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
a Child-Protection Door Lock system.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
NOTE:
• When the child lock system is engaged, the door can
only be opened by using the outside door handle
even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked
position.
• After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
• After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, rotate
the lock button to the unlocked position, roll down
the window, and open the door with the outside door
handle.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks
are engaged.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
4
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Adjustment Front Seats
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure
that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
Manual Seat Adjustment Levers
1 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Bar
2 — Seat Height Adjustment Lever
3 — Recline Lever
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment
On models equipped with manual seats, the forward/
rearward adjusting bar is located at the front of the
seats, near the floor.
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
might not be adjusted properly and you could be
injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is
parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
Height Adjustment
The front driver and passenger seats height can be
raised or lowered by using a lever, located on the
outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on the lever to
raise the seat height or push downward on the lever to
lower the seat height.
4
Recline Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
Power Adjustment Front Seats — If Equipped
The power seat controls are located on the outboard
side of the seat, close to the floor.
Use the switch to move the seat up/down, forward/
rearward, tilt if equipped and to set the angle of the
seatback.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Recline Switch
3 — Power Lumbar Switch
Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Height Adjustment
Heated Seats — If Equipped
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
The heated seat switches are located on the instrument
panel.
Recline Adjustment
Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward, the
seatback will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position has been
reached.
Tilt Adjustment
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move
in the direction of the switch.
Power Lumbar Adjustment
Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or
decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward
or downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.
You can choose between two heating levels:
• Push the heated seat button
setting on.
• Push the heated seat button
turn the LO setting on.
• Push the heated seat button
the heating elements off.
once to turn the HI
a second time to
a third time to turn
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after approximately
145 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the
display will change from HI to LO, indicating the
change. The LO-level setting will turn off automatically
after approximately 60 minutes.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
WARNING! (Continued)
Vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the heated seats
can be programmed to come on during a Remote Start
until the ignition switch is cycled to the RUN position.
Auto On Comfort — If Equipped
If the external temperature is below 40 °F (5 °C) at each
start-up of the vehicle the heated seat functionality of
the driver’s seat is turned on to HI-level.
Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could
cause serious burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
Rear Seats
The split rear seat increases the storage of the rear cargo
area.
NOTE:
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
(Continued)
• Prior to folding the rear seat down, it may be
necessary to position the front seat to its mid-track
position. Be sure that the front seats are fully upright
and positioned forward, this will allow the rear seat
to fold down easily.
• You may experience deformation in the seat cushion
from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded
for an extended period of time. This is normal and by
simply opening the seats to the open position, over
time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
4
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Rear Shelf Support Links
Removing Shelf — If Equipped
Proceed as follows:
1. Disconnect the two links that support the shelf at the
eyelets.
1 — Eyelets
2 — Links
2. Lift the rear part of the overhead luggage shelf.
3. Clear the pins placed outside of the shelf, and then
remove the rear shelf pulling it upwards.
4. The rear shelf can be stored in the cargo area, or
behind the front seatbacks.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
Partial Enlargement Of Cargo Area
Enlargement of the left side of the cargo area allows you
to carry a single passenger on the right side of the rear
seat, while the enlargement of the right side allows you
to carry two passengers.
4
Proceed as follows:
1. Remove the rear shelf (if equipped).
2. Fully lower the rear seat head restraints.
3. Move the safety belts to the outboard side of the seat
and rest them on the seat belt guide.
4. Pull the seatback release lever to fold the left or right
rear seatback completely forward.
Seatback Release Lever
Cargo Area Enlargement
Folding both sides of the rear seat provides additional
storage in the rear cargo area.
Proceed as follows:
1. Remove the rear shelf (if equipped).
2. Fully lower the rear seat head restraints.
3. Move the safety belts to the outboard side of the seat.
4. Pull the seatback release lever to fold both sides of
the rear seatbacks completely forward.
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Seatback Repositioning
NOTE: If interference from the cargo area prevents the
seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty
returning the seat to its proper position.
longer visible on the release lever. If the red notches
are visible, the seatback is not secure.
1. Move the safety belts to the seat belt guides on the
top edge of the seat to ensure the seatbacks properly
latch.
2. Lift the seatbacks, pushing them back until they lock
on both the latches. Verify the red notches are no
Rear Seat Latch
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Front Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the
top of the head restraint is located above the top of your
ear.
Your vehicle is equipped with driver and passenger
head restraints.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while
the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with
the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located on the base of the head restraint, 4
and push downward on the head restraint.
To remove the head restraint recline the backrest of the
seat to avoid interference with the roof. Raise the head
restraint as far as it can go then push the release button
and adjustment button at the base of each post while
pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and
push downward. Then adjust it to the appropriate
height.
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely
stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the re-installation instructions above prior
to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
Front Head Restraint
1 — Adjustment Button
2 — Release Button
NOTE: Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain
additional clearance to the back of the head.
Rear Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with two outboard head
restraints and one center head restraint for its rear
passengers. The rear head restraints can be raised or
lowered. When the center seat is being occupied, the
head restraint should be in the raised position. When
there are no occupants in the center seat, the head
restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility for the
driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint,
and push downward on the head restraint.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go
then push the release button and adjustment button at
the base of each post while pulling the head restraint
up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint
posts into the holes and push downward. Then adjust it
to the appropriate height.
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely
stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the re-installation instructions above prior
to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
Rear Head Restraint
1 — Adjustment Button
2 — Release Button
NOTE: Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain
additional clearance to the back of the head.
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever
is located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
4
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or
driving with the steering column unlocked, could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning may result in serious
injury or death.
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Wheel
1 — Tilt/Telescoping Steering Wheel Lever
2 — Locked Position
3 — Unlocked Position
To unlock the steering column, push the tilt/telescoping
lever downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering
column, move the steering wheel upward or downward
as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column,
pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as
desired.
To lock the steering column in position, pull the tilt/
telescoping lever upward until fully engaged.
The steering wheel contains a heating element that
helps warm your hands in cold weather. The heated
steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once
has been turned
the heated steering wheel switch
on, it will operate for an average of 80 minutes or
more before automatically shutting off. This time
may vary depending on the environmental temperature. The heated steering wheel can shut off early or
may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
warm. The heated steering wheel control button is
located on the center of the instrument panel below
the climate controls.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
Auto On Comfort — If Equipped
If the external temperature is below 40 °F (5 °C) at each
start-up of the vehicle the heated steering wheel functionality is turned on.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion, or other physical conditions must
exercise care when using the steering wheel
heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This
may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
The mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and right.
The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window. Headlight glare from vehicles
behind you can be reduced by moving the lever under
the mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the
vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while the lever
under the mirror is set in the day position (toward the
windshield).
Mirror Lever
NOTE: The mirror will automatically release in the
event of heavy contact with a passenger.
4
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Auto Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on
or off by pushing the button at the base of the mirror. A
light to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate
when the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to
the right of the button does not illuminate.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.
Outside Mirrors
Power Adjustment Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door
panel.
To adjust the mirror, push the mirror adjustment switch
in the four directions indicated by arrows.
Dimming Mirror
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
NOTE:
Folding Mirror
• To adjust the power mirrors, the ignition must be in
RUN mode.
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to
pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The
mirror has three detent positions: full forward, normal
and full rearward.
• Once the mirror is adjusted, rotate the control to the
neutral position to avoid accidental movements.
4
Folding Exterior Mirror
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Mirror Adjustment Switch
2 — Mirror Selector Switch
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on
the Rear Window Defroster.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two
radar-based sensors, located inside the rear bumper
fascia, to detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot
zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational. The BSM system sensors operate when the
vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters
stand-by mode when the vehicle is in PARK.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle, 10 ft (3 m). The zone
length starts at the outside mirror and extends approximately 20 ft (6 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones
on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed
reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and
will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the radar sensors located on the
rear fascia with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle
racks, etc.).
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
detection zones.
• If a trailer is connected to the vehicle, it is necessary
to deactivate BSM system manually by settings menu
to avoid a miss-detection. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Rear Sensor Locations
4
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding
an audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” in this section for
further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
BSM Warning Light
Side Monitoring
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on
either side and enter the rear detection zone with a
relative speed of less than 31 mph (50 km/h).
4
Overtaking/Approaching
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
less than 15 mph (25 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(25 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Passing
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may
alert on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
Stationary Objects
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The
BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians,
bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is
equipped with the BSM system, always check your
vehicles mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use
your turn signal before changing lanes. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
1 mph (2 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 22 mph (35 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles
can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the 4
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side
of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
RCP is not a back up aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in
a parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful
when backing up, even when using RCP. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Mode Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate
side view mirror based on a detected object. However,
when the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP)
mode, the system will respond with both visual and
audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object.
If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to
an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and
detected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued.
In addition to the audible alert, the radio (if on) will also
be muted.
NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system will respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signal
status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the
chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off, there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled
and used.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
Blind Spot Monitoring Fault Warnings
Sensor Blinded
In the case of a sensor blinded:
• BSM Mirror Warning Lights are turned on continuously.
• An instrument cluster message will display “Blind
Spot Monitoring Unavailable - Wipe Rear Bumper
Corners.”
NOTE: The rear bumper must be clean and free of any
obstructing debris.
• An instrument cluster message will display “Blind
Spot Monitoring Unavailable - Service Required.”
NOTE: Vehicle must be taken to the nearest authorized
dealer for service.
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
System Not Available
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
In the case of the system being temporary unavailable:
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
• BSM Mirror Warning Lights are turned on continuously.
• An instrument cluster message will display “Blind
Spot Monitoring Temporary Unavailable.”
In the case of the system being completely unavailable:
• A chime will turn on.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
4
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlights
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. The headlight switch controls the
operation of the headlights, side marker lights, daytime
running lights, fog lights and the dimming of the
instrument cluster and interior lighting.
Turning on the headlights will illuminate the instrument cluster and the controls located on the instrument
panel.
Automatic Lighting — If Equipped
Light Sensor
The light sensor is equipped with an infrared LED,
located on the windshield. It detects changes in light
intensity outside the vehicle, based on the sensitivity of
light set by using the Menu on the display or on the
Uconnect system.
The higher the sensitivity, the lesser the amount of
external light required for controlling the lighting.
Automatic Headlights
Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO position.
Headlight Switch
1
2
3
4
— Rotate Headlight Switch
— Ambient Light Dimmer
— Instrument Panel Dimmer
— Push Fog Light Switch
When the automatic headlights are enabled, the headlight time delay is active. After the ignition switch is
placed in the STOP mode, the headlights will automatically turn off after approximately 90 seconds depending
on the settings of the feature.
The timing of the headlights is adjustable between 0, 30,
60 and 90 seconds. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the automatic mode.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will turn on when
the engine is started and remain on unless the headlights are turned on or the engine is shut off.
The DRLs will be disabled during turn signal operation
and resume operation when the turn signal operation
has ended.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
switch.
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or the low beam headlights and
push the headlight switch. To turn off the front fog
lights, push the headlight switch a second time or turn
off the headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE:
• The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on. Selecting the high beam
headlights will turn off the fog lights.
• The fog lights also function as cornering lights.
Therefore there will be times when only one light is 4
on.
Parking Lights
Rotate the headlight switch to the first position to turn
on the parking lights. The parking light indicator in the
cluster will illuminate.
Headlight Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in
an unlit area.
The time delay of the headlights is programmable
between 0, 30, 60 and 90 seconds. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Headlight Delay Activation
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the
STOP position while the headlights are still on. Then,
turn off the headlights within two minutes. The delay
interval begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
Headlight Delay Disable
The feature is disabled by turning on the headlights, the
parking lights or by placing the ignition in RUN mode.
If you shut off the lights before the ignition is turned on,
they will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within two
minutes of placing the ignition in STOP mode to
activate this feature.
High Beams
To turn on the high beam headlights, push the turn
signal lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle)
and an indicator will illuminate in the cluster. To turn
off the high beams, pull the turn signal lever rearward
(toward the rear of the vehicle).
High Beam And Turn Signal Controls
NOTE: The headlights must be on for the high beams to
activate.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the
arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to
show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal
lights.
4
When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a turn
signal is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp will
turn off on the side of the vehicle in which the turn
signal is flashing. The Daytime Running Lamp will turn
back on when the turn signal is turned off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Front Courtesy Light
The courtesy lights will automatically turn on when the
door is open or closed. The light switches in the
overhead console are for reading lamps.
Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Left Courtesy/Reading Light
Left Light Switch
Right Light Switch
Right Courtesy/Reading Light
Push the driver or passenger light switch to operate the
reading lamps individually.
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the interior
lights are turned off. This will prevent the battery
from discharging once the doors are closed.
• If a light is left on it will automatically be turned off
after approximately 15 minutes after the ignition is in
STOP mode.
NOTE: The timing stops once the ignition is placed in
the RUN or START mode.
The dome light will turn off under any of the following
conditions:
• The dome light is disabled when the ignition is
placed in the RUN or START mode.
Dome Light Timing
• The dome lights will turn off automatically when the
doors are locked.
The Dome Light will automatically illuminate when the
doors are unlocked, the doors are opened or after the
doors are closed.
• The dome lights will automatically turn off after
approximately fifteen minutes of inactivity to preserve the battery.
Timing Entering The Vehicle
Timing Exiting The Vehicle
The dome lights illuminate in the following ways:
The dome light will illuminate under the following
conditions when the ignition is turned to the STOP
mode:
• When the doors are unlocked, the dome light will
illuminate for approximately 27 seconds.
• When one of the doors is opened, the dome light will
illuminate for approximately three minutes.
• When the doors are closed, the dome light will
automatically shut off after approximately 27 seconds.
• The dome light will illuminate for 27 seconds after
the key is removed from the vehicle.
• The opening of one of the doors (approximately three
minutes).
• After closing a door (approximately 27 seconds).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
The dome light timing is disabled when the doors are
locked.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on each sun
visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and
swing the mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on
automatically. Closing the mirror cover will turn the
light off.
Lower Glove Compartment Light
An interior light is located is the lower glove compartment.
This light automatically turn on/off when the glove
compartment is opened and closed, regardless of the
4
position of the ignition.
Lower Glove Compartment Light
Vanity Mirror Light
NOTE: In order to preserve the life of the battery, the
light will turn off after 15 minutes.
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Dome Light — If Equipped
Push the switch on the rear dome light once to turn the
light on, the light will remain on at all times. Push the
switch a second time to turn the light off, the lights will
remain off until a door is opened.
Rear Interior Light
The lights come on by opening any of the doors.
Cargo Area Lights
Rear Dome Light On/Off Switch
Vehicles With Retractable Roof
For vehicles equipped with a retractable roof, there are
two interior lights located below the grab handles of the
rear doors.
An interior light is located on the left side panel in the
cargo area.
This light automatically turn on/off when the liftgate is
opened and closed, regardless of the position of the
ignition.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotate the
instrument panel dimmer control upward or downward to increase or decrease the brightness of the
instrument panel. At the top detent of the instrument
panel dimmer, all the interior lights will also illuminate.
At the bottom most setting of the thumb wheel will turn
all the interior lights to their lowest dimmable setting. 4
Cargo Light
NOTE: In order to preserve the life of the battery, the
light will turn off after 15 minutes.
Instrument Panel Dimmer And Ambient Light
Control
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or downward to increase or decrease the brightness of the
ambient light located in the overhead console, door
handle lights, lower instrument panel lights, door map
pocket lights, and cubby bin lights.
Headlight Switch
1 — Ambient Light Control — If Equipped
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WIPERS AND WASHERS
CAUTION! (Continued)
Front Wiper Operation
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on
the lever on the right side of the steering column. The
front wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located
on the end of the lever.
“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the
“park” position, damage to the wiper motor may
occur.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the windshield wiper knob to one of the two
detent positions for intermittent settings, the third
detent for low wiper operation and the fourth for high
wiper operation.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold
while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the
intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate
for several wipe cycles after the lever is released, and
then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
Windshield Wiper Stalk
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
(Continued)
If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off
position, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles,
then turn off.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead.
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of two
settings to activate this feature.
4
Mist
Use this feature when weather conditions make occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever
upward to the MIST position and release for a single
wiping cycle.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Rain Sensor — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
Rain Sensor Location
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the
least sensitive, and wiper delay position two is the most
sensitive. Setting one should be used for normal rain
conditions, and can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Setting two can be used if the driver
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the
off (O) position when not using the system.
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the
windshield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
first turned to RUN, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle
speed is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside
temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is in RUN mode, and the automatic transmission is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is
moved, vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h),
or the gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL
position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has
placed the ignition switch in RUN mode, rain sensing
wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and
no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the lever
on the right side of the steering column. The rear
wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch, located
at the middle of the lever.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to
the first detent for intermittent operation and to
the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
To use the washer, push the lever forward
and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is
pushed while in the intermittent setting, the
wiper will turn on and operate for several
wipe cycles after the end of the lever is released, and
then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
NOTE:
• As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 30 seconds. Once the
lever is released, the pump will resume normal
operation.
• When front wipers are continuous and the vehicle is
shifted in REVERSE, the rear wiper will perform one
round up to clean the rear window.
If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the off
position, the wiper will operate for several wipe cycles,
then turn off.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is
turned to the STOP mode, the wiper will automatically
return to the “park” position.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located
with the Climate Controls on the instrument
panel. Push this button to turn on the rear window
defroster. An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window 4
defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20
minutes. To manually shut the defroster off, push the
button a second time.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage
to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft
cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled
off after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of
the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield Wiper
De-Icer feature that may be activated under the following conditions:
Air Outlet And Diffuser Locations — Passenger
Compartment
• Activation By Front Defrost — The Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will be activated automatically in the
case of a cold weather manual start with full front
defrost, and the ambient temperature is below 40° F
(4.4° C).
• Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will be activated automatically when
the rear defrost is turned on and the ambient temperature is below 40° F (4.4° C).
• Activation By Remote Start Operation — When
Remote Start is active and the outside ambient temperature is less than 40° F (4.4° C), the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will be enabled. Upon exiting remote
start mode the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will remain
on.
Left Side Air Outlets
1
2
3
4
— Fixed Air Outlet
— Adjustable Air Outlet
— Air Vane Adjustment
— Air Flow Outlet Adjustment
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
4
Right Side Air Outlets
Center Air Outlets
1 — Air Flow Outlet Adjustment
2 — Adjustable Air Outlet
3 — Air Vane Adjustment
1
2
3
4
— Fixed Air Outlet
— Adjustable Air Outlet
— Air Vane Adjustment
— Air Flow Outlet Adjustment
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Climate Controls Overview
Manual Climate Controls
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
Icon
Description
MAX A/C Setting
MAX A/C sets the system for maximum cooling performance. Rotate the temperature control adjust knob counterclockwise to the MAX A/C setting. In MAX A/C, the blower speed
and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
Icon
Description
A/C Button
Push this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is engaged.
Recirculation Button
Push this control button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or
high humidity are present.
NOTE:
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window
fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog
on the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for maximum defogging.
• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Front Defrost Mode
Air is directed through the windshield and side window demister outlets. Use this mode
with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix or Defrost, even if the Air Conditioning (A/C) button is not pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield.
To improve fuel economy, use these modes only when required.
4
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon
Panel Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Description
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and
the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 20 minutes.
Temperature Control
Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment.
Rotating the dial counterclockwise into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures, while rotating clockwise into the red area indicates warmer temperatures. Rotating
the Temperature Control all the way counterclockwise results in turning on the MAX A/C
feature.
Blower Control
Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ventilation system in
any mode. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the “0”
(OFF) position.
Panel Mode
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to
direct airflow. The center instrument panel outlets can be adjusted so that they are directed
toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
Icon
Floor Mode
Mix Mode
Description
Floor Mode
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage
to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft
cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled
off after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of
the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Rear Window Defrosting
Push and release the rear window defrost button to turn
the function on/off.
Activation of this function is indicated by the rear
defrost indicator light on the instrument panel turning
on. The function is automatically deactivated after 20
minutes.
If equipped, push the rear defrost button to activate the
defrosting of door mirrors and heated rear window.
4
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To avoid causing damage to the rear window defroster heating filaments do not affix stickers or
other objects to the inside of the rear glass.
Air Recirculation
Push and release the Air Recirculation button so that the
LED is on, to enter recirculation mode. It is recommended to turn the internal air recirculation on while
standing in traffic or in tunnels to prevent the introduction of polluted air.
System Maintenance
In Winter, the Climate Control system must be turned
on at least once a month for approximately ten minutes.
Have the system inspected at an authorized dealer
before the summer.
NOTE: The system uses R-1234yf (refrigerant) which
does not pollute the environment in the event of
accidental leakage. Under no circumstances is the use of
R-134a (refrigerant) allowed.
Automatic Climate Control Overview
Do not use the function for a long period of time,
particularly if there are many passengers in the vehicle,
to prevent the windows from misting up.
NOTE: Internal air recirculation makes it possible to
reach the required heating or cooling conditions quickly
depending on the mode selected. Do not use the internal air recirculation function on rainy/cold days as it
would considerably increase the possibility of the windows misting.
Automatic Climate Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
Icon
Description
MAX A/C Setting
MAX A/C sets the system for maximum cooling performance. Rotate the driver temperature control adjust knob counterclockwise for MAX A/C. Both driver and passenger temperature displays will show MAX A/C LO. In MAX A/C, the blower speed and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings will cause the MAX
A/C operation to switch to the selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
A/C Button
Push the A/C Control Button to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when
the A/C is ON. Pushing the AUTO control button will cause the A/C operation to change
to AUTO mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
SYNC Button
Push the Sync button to toggle the Sync feature ON/OFF. The Sync indicator will illuminate when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature
setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting
while in Sync mode will automatically exit this feature and return to the separate management of air temperatures in the two zones.
4
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon
Description
Recirculation Button
Push to change the current setting. The LED illuminates when ON.
NOTE:
• When in Max Defrost mode, the Recirculation button will change the setting to normal
Defrost mode. This indicates that you can not enter to this mode due to fogging risk.
• When the Auto indicator is ON and the Recirculation indicator is off, the Recirculation is
in AUTO mode. If the Recirculation indicator is on, the Recirculation setting is manual
and Recirculation is on.
AUTO Button — If Equipped
Pushing this button will automatically control the interior cabin temperature by adjusting
airflow distribution and amount. Performing this function will cause the automatic climate
controls to change between manual mode and automatic modes.
MAX Defrost Button
Push the MAX Defrost button to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The
indicator illuminates when this feature is on. Performing this function will cause the automatic climate controls to change to manual mode. The blower speed increases to full (all
LEDs on) when MAX Defrost mode is selected, the air conditioning compressor is turned
on (LED on), both driver and passenger temperature controls are set to (HI), defrost mode
is selected (LED on), rear defroster is turned on (LED on) and the air recirculation is turned
off (LED off). If the MAX Defrost mode is turned off, the climate system will return to the
previous setting.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
Icon
Description
Rear Defrost Button
Push the Rear Defrost button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on.
The rear window defroster automatically turns OFF after 20 minutes.
Passenger Temperature Knob
Provides the passenger with independent temperature control. Rotate the adjustment knob
to set desired temperature shown in the Temperature Display. The set temperature is
shown on the display. Turning the control knob completely in one direction or the other
activates the HI (maximum heating) or LO (maximum cooling) functions shown in the display, respectively. To deactivate these functions, turn the temperature knob to the desired
temperature.
Windshield
Mode
NOTE: Rotating the Passenger Temperature Control knob while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync.
Blower Control Knob
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. Adjusting the blower will cause the automatic mode to change to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected by rotating the Blower Control adjustment knob.
Windshield Mode
Air comes from the outlets directed at the windshield meant for defrosting, and side window demisting. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat
to the windshield.
4
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon
Panel Mode
Floor Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Description
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a
shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode is obtained by pressing both the Panel Mode button and the Floor Mode
button, activating them both. Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: Bi-Level Mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of
the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
Icon
Mix Mode
Description
Mix Mode
Mix Mode is obtained by pressing both the Windshield Mode button and the Floor Mode
button, activating them both. Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window
demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra
heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control Power Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control on/off.
Driver Temperature Knob
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Rotate the adjustment knob to
set desired temperature shown in the Temperature Display. Rotate fully counterclockwise
for maximum A/C (LO). The set temperature is shown on the display. Turning the control
knob completely in one direction or the other activates the HI (maximum heating) or LO
(maximum cooling) functions shown in the display, respectively. To deactivate these functions, turn the temperature knob to the desired temperature.
4
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage
to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft
cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled
off after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of
the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Climate Control System Compressor
Push the A/C Control button to activate/deactivate the
compressor (activation is indicated by the LED on the
button turning on).
The system remembers that the compressor has been
turned off, even after the engine has stopped.
Pushing the A/C button will stop AUTO MODE
(AUTO LED will turn off). To restore automatic control
of compressor, push the AUTO button again.
NOTE: With the compressor off, air cannot be introduced to the passenger compartment with a temperature lower than the outside temperature. Under certain
environmental conditions, windows could fog rapidly
since the air is not dehumidified.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the system for maximum cooling performance.
Rotate the driver temperature control adjust knob counterclockwise for MAX A/C. Both driver and passenger
temperature displays will show MAX A/C LO.
In MAX A/C, the blower speed and mode position can
be adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other
settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to
the selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Rapid Window Demisting (MAX-Defrost Function)
Push the MAX-defrost button to activate (LED on) the
windshield and side window demisting function.
The Climate Control system carries out the following
operations:
• Turns on the air conditioning compressor when environmental conditions are suitable.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
• Turns air recirculation off.
• Sets blower fan to the maximum speed.
• Directs air flow to windshield and front side window
diffusers.
• Activates the heated rear window defrost.
• Activates the heated windshield (if equipped).
• Displays the fan speed (Blower Control Indicator
LED illuminated).
When the function is activated, the AUTO button LED
turns off. With the function activated, the only possible
manual adjustments are pushing the A/C control button, adjusting the fan speed and turning the heated rear
window off.
When the Recirculation Control or AUTO buttons are
pushed, the Climate Control system will deactivate the
Front Defrost (MAX-DEF) function.
Selecting the footwell/windshield or only windshield
distribution activates the Climate Control system compressor and the air recirculation is set to outside air
intake.
This logic guarantees optimum visibility at the windows. Max-defrost is also available in manual mode.
Rear Window Defrosting
Push and release the rear window defrost button to turn
the function on/off.
Activation of this function is indicated by the rear
defrost indicator light on the instrument panel turning
on. The function is automatically deactivated after 20
minutes. If equipped, push the rear defrost button to
activate the defrosting of door mirrors and heated rear
window.
CAUTION!
To avoid causing damage to the rear window defroster heating filaments do not affix stickers or
other objects to the inside of the rear glass.
Turning Off The Climate Control System
Push the ON/OFF button.
With the Climate Control system off:
• Air recirculation is on, isolating the passenger compartment from the outside.
4
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• The A/C compressor is off.
• The blower is off.
• The heated rear window can be activated/
deactivated.
NOTE: The Climate Control unit stores the temperatures set before the system was turned off and restores
them when one of the following knobs/buttons is
pushed:
• A/C
• Recirculation
• Max Defrost
• Blower Increase
• AUTO
To restart the Climate Control system in fully automatic
mode, push the AUTO button.
System Maintenance
In Winter, the Climate Control system must be turned
on at least once a month for approximately ten minutes.
Have the system inspected at an authorized dealership
before the summer.
NOTE: The system uses R-1234yf (refrigerant) which
does not pollute the environment in the event of
accidental leakage. Under no circumstances is the use of
R-134a (refrigerant) allowed.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the front ATC panel and
the word “AUTO” will illuminate in the front ATC
display, along with two temperatures for the driver
and front passenger. The system will then automatically regulate the amount of airflow.
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the system to
maintain, by adjusting the driver, and passenger
temperatures. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically
maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it
is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
the system to function automatically.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
NOTE:
Operating Tips
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as
possible.
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will
remain on low until the engine warms up. The fan will
engage immediately if the Defrost mode is selected, or
by changing the front blower knob setting.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC
display will be turned off when the system is being
used in the manual mode.
NOTE: The system will not automatically sense the
presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. Defrost
mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and
concentration of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended, because it may cause window fogging.
4
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Vacation/Storage
Outside Air Intake
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes, in
fresh air with the blower setting on high. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves.
Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow,
and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water
drains. In Winter months, make sure the air intake is
clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Window Fogging
The climate control system filters out dust and pollen
from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service
your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when
needed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild,
rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the windows,
select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front
blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode
without A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur.
Cabin Air Filter
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
Operating Tips Chart
4
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
Driver’s Door Controls
The power window switch is located on the driver’s
door panel. The driver’s power window switch controls
the operation of all the windows.
There are single window controls on each passenger
door trim panel, which operate the passenger door
windows. The window controls will operate only when
the ignition is in the ON/RUN or START position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Uconnect, the
power window switches will remain active for up to
three minutes after the ignition is cycled to the STOP/
OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
WARNING!
Power Window Switches
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Opening/Closing Left Front Window
Opening/Closing Right Front Window
Opening/Closing Right Rear Window
Window Lockout Switch (Rear Doors)
Opening/Closing Left Rear Window
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and
do not let children play with power windows. Do
not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
Auto-Down Feature — If Equipped
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
4
Push To Activate Auto-Down Feature
Lift To Activate Auto-Up Feature
The driver and passenger power window switches have
an Auto-down feature. Push the switch for half a second
and release it; the window will go down automatically.
Lift and hold the window switch for half a second,
release, and the window will go up automatically.
To partially open the window, push the window switch
and release it when you want the window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way up during
the Auto operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-down operation, pull up on the switch
briefly when the when the window has reached the
desired position.
To partially close the window, lift the window switch
and release it when you want the window to stop.
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Wind Buffeting
• If the window runs into any obstacle during autoclosure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
switch again to close the window.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting
occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and
rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during
auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly
and hold to close the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The sunroof has two glass panels (the front one is
operational and the rear one fixed) and is equipped
with two manual operated sun blinds, front and rear.
The power sunroof can be operated only with the
ignition is placed in RUN mode.
The power sunroof switches are located in the overhead
console.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103
WARNING! (Continued)
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts,
or any object to project through the sunroof
opening. Injury may result.
Operation Switch
1 — Front Panel Open/Close Switch
2 — Front Panel Vent Switch
Opening The Sunroof
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
(Continued)
To retract the front panel to the open position, push the
open/close button and the sunroof will fully open. The
sunroof can be stopped in any position by pushing the
switch a second time while is opening.
Venting The Front Panel
To vent the sunroof push and hold the vent switch.
NOTE: The vent switch has the automatic function only
at the opening of the roof, during the closing of the roof,
the expected functionality is only that manual.
4
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Closing The Sunroof
Anti-Pinch Safety Device
To close the front panel completely, pull the sunroof
switch from the open position. The sunroof can be
stopped in any position by pulling the sunroof switch a
second time while it is closing.
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an
obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, push the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
NOTE: During the open/close or vent operation any
push on the switches will stop the closing of the panel.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting
occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and
rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
Sun Shade
The two sun shades are manually operated and can be
adjusted in any position.
Emergency Operation
If the power sunroof switch fails, the sunroof can be
operated manually as follows:
1. Remove the protective cap located on the inner
lining.
2. Remove the Allen Key that is supplied in the tool bag
in the cargo area.
3. Insert the Allen Key into the key hole and turn it
clockwise to open the roof or counter-clockwise to
close.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105
Power Sunroof Relearn Procedure
As a result of any abnormal behavior of the roof or as a
result of an emergency operation, and you must relearn
the automatic operation of the sunroof.
Proceed as follows:
1. Push the open/close button to move the roof in the
fully closed position.
2. Bring the ignition to STOP mode and wait for at least
10 seconds.
Emergency Key And Key Hole
3. Bring the ignition to the RUN mode.
4. Pull the open/close button and hold it for at least 10
seconds, after which you should feel the mechanical
stop of the electric motor of the roof.
1 — Allen Key
2 — Key Hole
CAUTION!
• When refitting sunroof, be careful to avoid fingers, scarves, ties and items of clothing from
getting caught under the panel.
• Do not open the roof in the presence of snow or
ice. There is risk of damage.
5. Within five seconds, pull to close and hold the
open/close button, the roof makes a complete cycle
of opening and closing automatically (to indicate
that the relearn procedure has been successful). If
this does not happen and you need to repeat the
procedure from the beginning.
4
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HOOD
Opening
The hood release lever (to open the primary latch) and
safety latch (to open the secondary latch) must be
released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the driver’s
side of the instrument panel.
Safety Latch Release lever Location
4. Remove the support rod from the locking tab and
insert it into the seat located on the underside of the
hood.
Hood Release Lever
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle.
3. Push the safety latch release lever toward the passenger side of the vehicle. The safety latch is located
behind the center front edge of the hood.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107
Closing
1. Hold up the hood with one hand and with the other
hand remove the support rod from its seat and
reinsert it into the locking tab.
2. Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
from the engine compartment and drop it. Make sure 4
that the hood is completely closed.
WARNING!
Hood Prop System
1 — Locking Tab
2 — Support Rod
3 — Support Rod Seat
NOTE:
• Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms are
not in motion and not in the lifted position.
• While lifting the hood, use both hands.
• Vehicle must be at a stop and the automatic transmission must be in PARK. Manual transmission
vehicles must have the electric park brake engaged.
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and block
your vision. Failure to follow this warning could
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood
to close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood
is fully closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle
unless hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
LIFTGATE
The liftgate release function is disabled when the vehicle is in motion.
Opening
Opening From Outside
To unlock the liftgate from the outside, squeeze the
electronic liftgate release and pull the liftgate open with
one fluid motion.
When opening the door, the turn signal lights will flash
twice and the interior dome light will illuminate. The
interior dome light will turn off automatically by closing the liftgate. Refer to “Interior Lights” in “Getting To
Know Your Vehicle.”
If the liftgate is left open, the interior dome light will
shut off after a few minutes to conserve battery life.
Internal Emergency Release
Proceed as follows:
1. Lower the headrests and fold the seatbacks.
Electronic Liftgate Release
1 — Yellow Tab
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 109
2. Using the supplied screwdriver (located under cargo
floor in tool kit), remove the yellow tab.
3. Insert the screwdriver into the release tab slot to
trigger the release tab of the liftgate.
4
Liftgate Closing Handle
NOTE: Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in
possession of the key because the liftgate will be locked
automatically.
2 — Release Tab Slot
Cargo Area Features
Closing
Cargo Load Floor — If Equipped
Grasp the liftgate closing handle and lower the liftgate.
The vehicle is equipped with a load floor that can be
adjusted as needed.
Position 1 (Floor Flush):
This position allows you to make the load floor flat for
ease of loading/unloading objects from the cargo area.
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
This position also makes it possible to use the space
below as another compartment for storing fragile or
smaller objects.
Position 2 (Elevated Position):
When the rear seatbacks and front passenger seat is
folded flat, it will allow for loading objects of long
dimensions. It is recommended to use this position only
during the actual transporting of the objects, then bring
the load floor in position 1.
NOTE: With a full size spare, the floor will be at the
elevated position.
Access To The Loading Floor
To access the double load compartment, proceed as
follows:
1. Lift up on the Load Floor Handle.
Load Floor Handle
1 — Cargo Load Floor
2 — Cargo Load Floor Handle
2. Place the desired objects inside the compartment.
3. Reposition the load floor.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 111
Access To Tire Service Kit Or Spare Tire
To access the Tire Service Kit or spare tire and container
carrier, proceed as follows:
1. Grasp the load floor handle and remove the floor.
2. Pull the tab and lift up on the carpet.
Anchoring Of The Load
The cargo tie-downs, located on the trim panels around
the cargo area floor, should be used to safely secure
loads when the vehicle is moving.
Cargo Area Storage
CAUTION!
The load floor must be arranged in a central position with respect to cargo area.
Displacement Load Floor
To position the load from the lower to the upper
position, proceed as follows:
1. Grasp the load floor handle and lift up the load floor.
2. Correctly place the load floor on the side panel
guides and on the rear cross member.
Tie-Downs
4
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Box — If Equipped
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
The cargo area contains a preformed cargo box that can
be used for the storage of objects that allows you to
obtain a uniform level when loading.
Glove Compartments
The glove compartments are located on the passenger
side of the instrument panel.
Upper Glove Compartment
To open the upper compartment, push in the button
located on the bottom side of the upper door. The door
will automatically open.
Cargo Box
NOTE: The cargo box is sized for a maximum capacity
of distributed weight equal to 242 lbs (110 kg).
Upper Glove Compartment Button
To close the compartment door, push downward on the
door’s surface to latch the door closed.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 113
Lower Glove Compartment
Sun Visors “Slide-On-Rod”
To open the lower glove compartment, pull outward on
the latch and lower the glove compartment door.
Sun visors are located on both sides of the rearview
mirror. The visors can be lowered or moved to the side
to help block sunlight from entering the windshield or
door glass.
To move the sun visor against the driver or passenger 4
door glass, remove the sun visor from the hook and
turn it toward the side window.
Lower Glove Compartment Latch
Once the glove compartment is open, a light will turn
on to illuminate the compartment.
NOTE:
• Do not insert objects in the glove compartments that
will not allow the compartment to fully close.
• The glove compartments should be completely
closed while the vehicle is in motion.
Sun Visor Mirror Cover
The visors also have illuminated vanity mirrors to allow
use in low light conditions.
Lift upward on the mirror cover to access the mirror.
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Extendible Sun Visor
Power Outlets
To extend the sun visor, proceed as follows:
The front power outlet is located under the center stack
of the instrument panel. It only operates with the
ignition in the RUN position.
1. Place the sun visor against the door glass by detaching it from the hook and turning it toward the side
window.
2. Slide the visor.
3. Slide out the sun visor extender.
12 Volt Power Outlet
Fully Extended Sun Visor
NOTE: The power outlet can be changed to “battery”
powered all the time by switching the power outlet
Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution Unit fuse
from location F84 to F23.
Models equipped with the optional ⬙smoker kit,⬙ will
have a cigar lighter instead of the power outlet.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 115
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
CAUTION!
Do not connect devices with power higher than 180
Watts (15 Amps) to the socket. Do not damage the
socket by using unsuitable adaptors. If the 180 Watt
(15 Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
(Continued)
Cigar Lighter — If Equipped
NOTE: Cigar lighters can be purchased at an authorized dealer through MOPAR parts. To ensure proper
cigar lighter operation, a MOPAR knob and element
must be used.
The cigar lighter is located on the center console. Push
lighter inward to heat.
4
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not connect devices with power higher than 180
Watts (15 Amps) to the socket. Do not damage the
socket by using unsuitable adaptors. If the 180 Watt
(15 Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced.
Ashtray — If Equipped
NOTE: Ashtrays can be purchased at an authorized
dealer through MOPAR parts.
Cigar Lighter
After a few seconds, the lighter automatically returns to
its initial position and is ready to be used.
WARNING!
When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot.
To avoid serious injury, handle the cigar lighter
with care. Always check that the cigar lighter has
turned off.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 117
The ashtray is a plastic container that can be placed into
one of the cup holders.
Front Armrest
The front armrest is located between the front seats.
The armrest can be adjusted by moving it in the
direction indicated by the arrows.
4
Ashtray Location
Front Armrest Handle
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cupholders
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers,
located in the center console.
Storage Compartment
Push the storage handle and lift up the armrest to access
the storage compartment.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury
in a collision.
Front Cupholders
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 119
Grab Handles
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The Grab Handles are located immediately above the
doors. The rear handles are equipped with hooks for
dress hangers.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Roof Luggage
Rack for transporting accessories.
Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is
placed on the Roof Luggage Rack. Check the straps
frequently to be sure that the load remains securely 4
attached.
NOTE: Crossbars can be purchased at a authorized
dealer through Mopar parts. External racks do not
increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle.
Be sure that the total occupant and luggage load inside
the vehicle, plus the load on the Roof Luggage Rack, do
not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
Rear Grab Handle Assembly
1 — Grab Handle
2 — Hook
The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a
luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and it
should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
Do not use the sunroof when using the crossbars.
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Roof rack cargo must be securely tied down before
driving your vehicle. Improperly secured loads may
fall off the vehicle, particularly at high speeds,
resulting in personal injury or property damage.
Follow the Roof Luggage Rack warnings and cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads, which extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, should be
secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.
• Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the
roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or
nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward
loads. This is especially true on large flat loads
and may result in damage to the cargo or your
vehicle.
CAUTION!
• To avoid damage to the Roof Luggage Rack and
vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof rack
load capacity. Always distribute heavy loads as
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Engine Oil Change Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
▫ Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . .123
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Main Menu . . . . .127
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . .123
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS . . . . . .134
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . . . . . . . . .125
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Description . . . . .125
▫ Mapping And Reconfigurable Zone Display — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons .126
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . .151
▫ White Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . .153
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .153
5
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster
NOTE: The illumination of the graphics on the instrument cluster may vary according to the version (Monocolor or Color display).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 123
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Speedometer
• Indicates the speed of the car.
2. Fuel Level Gauge
• The fuel gauge in the instrument cluster display
indicates the amount of fuel left in the tank.
• The light comes on, together with a chime and the
display of a message in the instrument cluster
display, when the gas tank has 1.5 to 2 gallons (5 to
7 liters) of fuel remaining.
3. Instrument Cluster Display
• The vehicle can be equipped with multifunctional
instrument cluster display which offers useful information to the driver.
• With the ignition in the STOP/OFF position (and
the key removed, for vehicles with mechanical
key), opening/closing of a door will activate the
instrument cluster display for viewing, and display
the total miles or kilometers in the odometer.
4. Engine Coolant Temperature
• The temperature gauge in the instrument cluster
display displays the temperature of the engine
coolant and starts providing indications when the
coolant temperature exceeds approximately 122° F.
In the normal use of the car, the temperature gauge
can move in different directions based on the use of
the car. The light comes on, together with a chime
and the display of a message in the instrument
cluster display, to indicate an excessive increase in
the temperature of the engine coolant. Stop the 5
engine and contact you approved automotive
dealer.
5. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine RPM.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide
excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as
engine emissions well within current government regulations.
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II
system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL).” It will also store diagnostic codes and other
information to assist your service technician in making
repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable
and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions controls. Authorized service technicians may need
to access this information to assist with the diagnosis
and service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection port
in order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including personal information.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in
“Multimedia”.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Instrument Cluster Display Description
The vehicle can be equipped with an instrument cluster
display which offers useful information to the driver.
The display shows the following information, if
equipped:
ZONE LOCATIONS
Zone 1 & 3
With the ignition in the STOP/OFF position, opening/
closing of a door will activate the display for viewing,
and display the total miles or kilometers in the odometer.
Mapping And Reconfigurable Zone Display — If
Equipped
Zone 2
Zone 4
Zone 5
Zone 6
Telltales Bottom Left
Telltales Bottom right
Mapping And Reconfigurable Zone Display
CONTENT
Date
Compass
Time
Ext. Temp
Automatic Gear Display
Audio Information
Browsing Arrows
Display Menu Titles
Speed Display
Trip
Fuel Economy
Turn By Turn Navigation
Odometer Reading
Cruise Control Speed Set
Speed Buzzer
Red
Yellow
5
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
• Down Arrow Button
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Push and release the down arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and
submenus.
• Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
• Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
• OK Button
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
1 — Arrow Up/Down Scroll Through Menus And Submenus
2 — Arrow Right/Left Access Information/Submenu Screens
3 — OK Button For Selecting And Resetting Information
• Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu and
submenus.
The OK button may be used for the following:
• Select
• Reset (hold)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127
Engine Oil Change Reset
Instrument Cluster Display Main Menu
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Change Engine Oil”
message will display in the instrument cluster display.
The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle
based, which means the engine oil change interval may
fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style.
The Main Menu is composed of several options that can
be selected using the control buttons above.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure.
• For some items, a submenu is provided.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not
start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly, three times,
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
NOTE:
• The display mode of the menu items varies depending on the type of display.
• In the Uconnect system, some items on the menu are
not shown on the instrument cluster display.
Instrument Cluster Display Menu/Submenu
Items
The Menu is composed of the following items:
• Trip
– Speedometer
– Instantaneous Info
– Trip A
– Trip B
5
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Drive Mode Selector
– Auto Mode
– Sport Mode
– Traction/All Weather Mode
Trip
• Vehicle Info
– Tire Pressure
– Oil Temperature
– Battery Voltage
• Speedometer
– View and change the speedometer scale from
MPH to km/h (km/h to MPH).
• Driver Assist
– Lane Departure Warning
• Audio
• Navigation
• Messages
• Settings
– Display
– Units
– Clock & Date
– Security
– Safety & Assistance
– Lights
– Doors & Locks
This instrument cluster display menu item allows you
to view and select information about the ⬙Trip Computer”:
• Instantaneous info
– View the distance to empty(miles or km).
– View the instantaneous consumption (mpg, or l/
100km or km/l).
• Trip A
– View and change Trip A distance (miles or km).
– View and change travel time A (hours/minutes/
seconds).
– View and change average consumption A (mpg, or
l/ 100km or km/l).
– View and change average speed A (MPH
or km/h).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129
• Trip B
– View and change Trip B distance (miles or km).
– View and change travel time B (hours/minutes/
seconds).
– View and change average consumption B (mpg, or
l/ 100km or km/l).
– View and change average speed B (MPH
or km/h).
Drive Mode Selector
This instrument cluster display menu/submenu items
allows you to view and select information about the
⬙Drive Mode⬙:
• Traction/All Weather Mode
– 4x4/4x2 Percentage of Traction
– Traction Mode Description
– Temperature
– All Weather Mode Description
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until 5
⬙Vehicle Info⬙ is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the right arrow button and
Coolant Temp will be displayed. Push the right or left
arrow button to scroll through the following information displays:
• Auto Mode
– Drive Style
– Instantaneous consumption
– Auto Mode Description
– Current Trip A average consumption
• Tire pressure
– View the information relating to the TPMS system
(if equipped).
• Sport Mode
– Acceleration
– Turbo Boost or Engine Power
– Sport Mode Description
• Battery Voltage
– View the voltage value (state of charge) of the
battery.
• Oil Temperature
– View the engine oil temperature.
130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Driver Assist
• ⬙MP3”: title display or number song playing
This menu item allows you to change the settings
(⬙Notice LaneSense⬙ and ⬙Intensity LaneSense⬙) relating
to the LaneSense system (if equipped):
• ⬙USB⬙: title display or number song playing
• Notice LaneSense
• By selecting this function, you can select the ⬙readiness⬙ of LaneSense, choosing between the options
⬙Near,⬙ ⬙Medium,⬙ or ⬙Far.⬙
• ⬙Ipod⬙: display the song title and graphic element.
• “Bluetooth”: Displays the song title and a graphic
element.
• “SAT”: displays the station name and a graphic
element.
• Intensity LaneSense
• Using this function, you can select the force applied
to the steering wheel to keep the car in the roadway
through the electrical drive system due to LaneSense.
• “AUX”: displays graphic element.
Audio
This menu item allows you to display the information
messages/malfunction stored.
This menu item allows you to view the instrument
cluster display and the information present on the
display of the Uconnect system.
The information displayed is:
• “Radio (AM or FM)”: view Radio Station Name (if
equipped), frequency, and graphical icon
• “APP”: displays strings and a graphic element.
Messages (Stored)
The background color of the display varies according to
the priorities of the failure:
• Failed Messages with low priority displays in yellow
• Failed Messages with high priority displays in red
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131
Settings
This menu item allows you to change the settings for
the following:
• Display
• Units
• Clock and Date
• Security
• Safety and Assistance
• Lights
• Doors and Locks
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for more
information.
Display
By selecting ⬙Display,⬙ you can access the following
settings:
• Screen Setup: Allows you to configure the display
screen.
• Language: Allows you to select the language in
which to display the information/warnings.
• Automatic Reset Trip B: Allows you to set the options
to reset the Trip B (never, always, every 2 hours or
every 8 hours).
• Phone Repetition: Allows you to select “On” or
“Off,” The instrument cluster display can also display the information concerning phone mode. The
information that can be displayed is the connection
status of the mobile phone (phone connected or 5
disconnected), the active telephone calls/
incoming/on hold, and the management of double
calls (first incoming second waiting, etc.).
• Navigation Repetition: Allows you to select “On” or
“Off”, on the instrument cluster display, information
relating to the navigation mode.
Units
By selecting the item ⬙Units Of Measure,” you can select
the unit of measure used in the display.
Possible options are:
• US
• Metric
• Custom
132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Clock And Date
Safety And Assistance
By selecting the item ⬙clock and date,⬙ you can adjust
the clock.
By selecting the item ⬙Safety & Assistance,⬙ you can
make the following adjustments:
• FCW: A selection of operating modes of the system
Forward Collision Warning Plus.
• FCW Sensitivity: A selection of the ⬙readiness⬙ of
intervention of the Forward Collision Warning Plus
system, based on the distance to the obstacle.
• ParkSense: A selection of the type of information
provided by ParkSense.
Possible options are:
• Set Time: Adjust hours/minutes.
• Set Format: Adjust the time format ⬙12h⬙ (12 hours) or
⬙24h⬙ (24 hours).
• Set Date: Adjust day/month/year.
Security
By selecting the item “Security,” you can make the
following adjustments:
• Speed Warning: Set the vehicle speed limit (MPH
or km/h), which the driver is notified through a
visual and acoustic signaling (display of a message
and a symbol on the display).
• Seat Belt Buzzer: This function is only viewable when
the Seat Belt Reminder (SBR) system is active.
• Hill Start Assist: Activation/Deactivation of the Hill
Start Assist system.
• ParkSense Vol.: A selection of the volume of acoustic
signals provided by ParkSense.
• Auto Wipers: Enabling/disabling the automatic operation of wipers in the event of rain.
• LaneSense Warning: A selection of the ⬙readiness⬙ of
intervention of LaneSense.
• Warning Buzzer Volume: Increase or decrease the
volume of the buzzerby selecting “Low”, “Medium”,
or “High”.
• Maintenance Brakes — If Equipped: Activation of the
procedure to carry out braking system maintenance.
• Auto Park Brake — If Equipped: Enable/disable
auto-insertion of the Electric Parking Brake.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133
Lights
By selecting the item ⬙Lights,⬙ you can make the following adjustments:
• Headlight Off Delay: Set the delay for headlight
shutoff after engine shutoff.
• Headlight Sensor: Adjust the sensitivity of headlight
brightness.
• Interior Ambient Lights: Increase of decrease the
brightness of the Interior Ambient Lights.
• Greeting Lights: Enable/disable the vehicle’s Greeting Lights.
• Auto High Beam: Activate/deactivate the automatic
main beam headlights — If Equipped.
• Daytime Lights: Activate/deactivate the daytime
running lights.
• Cornering Lights: activate/deactivate the cornering
lights — If Equipped.
Doors And Locks
By selecting the item ⬙Doors & Locks,⬙ you can make the
following adjustments:
• Auto Door Lock: Activate/deactivate the automatic
locking of the doors with the vehicle moving.
• Auto Unlock On Exit: Automatic unlocking of the
doors when exiting the vehicle.
• Flash Light With Lock: Activate the direction indicators when closing the doors.
• Sound Horn With Lock: Activate/deactivate the horn 5
when pushing the lock button on the Remote Keyless
Entry. The options are ⬙Off,⬙ ⬙First Press,” and ⬙Second Press.⬙
• Horn With Remote Start: activate/deactivate the
horn at the Remote Starting of the engine with the
Remote Keyless Entry.
• Unlock On First Press Of Key Fob (vehicles without
Passive Entry): allows you to choose whether to
unlock all the doors or only the driver’s side door on
the first push of the unlock button on the Remote
Keyless Entry.
• Remote Door Unlock: Allows you to open the driver
door only on the first push of the unlock button on
the Remote Keyless Entry.
• Passive Entry — If Equipped: Activate the automatic
locking of the doors.
134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
The warning/indicator lights switch on in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or
acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the
information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which
you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always
refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a
failure indication.
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is
first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer
to “Occupant Restraints” in “Safety” for further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will
sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the
brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is
at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the AntiLock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake Booster, the ABS
pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
NOTE: Brake Warning Light may illuminate due to excessive wear to brake pads.
5
136 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake
system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which
will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master
cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have
failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You
could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked
immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD).
CAUTION!
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light.
Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by placing the ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
position. The light should illuminate for approximately
two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the
parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If
the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by
an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition placed in the MAR (ACC/
ON/RUN) position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137
Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
or a related component.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency.”
Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the light turns on while driving,
safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return
to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.
NOTE:
As the coolant temperature gauge approaches ⬙H,⬙ a Red Dot lamp located to the left of the
“H” will illuminate and a single chime will sound. Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass ⬙H.⬙ In this case, a continuous chime will sound until the engine is allowed
to cool or the 4 minute duration is expired, whichever comes first.
5
138 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Door Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
• Driver’s Door Open
• Passenger Door Open
• Driver and Passenger Door Open
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Electric Power Steering).
Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
Hood Open Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the hood is ajar/open and not fully closed.
5
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
140 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Transmission Fault Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate (together with a message in the instrument cluster display and a
buzzer) to indicate a transmission fault. Contact your authorized dealer if the message remains after restarting the engine.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually
cause severe transmission damage or transmission
failure.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
5
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and
you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first placed in the
MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not
come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
142 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.3–1.8 gal (5–7 L) this light will turn on, and
remain on until fuel is added.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light
will illuminate when the ignition is in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position before engine start.
If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from STOP (OFF/LOCK) to MAR (ACC/
ON/RUN), have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the
light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical
driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
WARNING!
CAUTION!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if
you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc.
This could result in death or serious injury to the
driver, occupants or others.
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
control system. It also could affect fuel economy
and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe
catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon
occur. Immediate service is required.
(Continued)
Wait To Start Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Wait To Start Light
The “Wait To Start” telltale will illuminate for approximately two seconds when the ignition
is turned to the RUN position. It’s duration may be longer based on colder operating conditions. Vehicle will not initiate start until telltale is out. Refer to “Starting The Engine” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
NOTE: The “Wait To Start” telltale may not illuminate if the intake manifold temperature is
warm enough.
5
144 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Security Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the vehicle security alarm system has detected an attempt was made to break into the vehicle.
Transmission Temperature Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Temperature Indicator Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the
vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually
cause severe transmission damage or transmission
failure.
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires
as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated
tire repair kit and contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
5
146 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for
a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
Stop Light Failure Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Stop Light Failure Indicator Light
This light will illuminate if one or more of the stop light bulb fails.
The failure relating to this light could be:
• One or more blown bulbs
• A blown protection fuse
• A break in the electrical connection
Service Warning Indicator Light – If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Warning Indicator Light
The “Scheduled Servicing Plan” includes vehicle maintenance at fixed intervals, refer to the
⬙Maintaining And Caring For Your Vehicle⬙ chapter. This message is displayed automatically
along with the warning light when the key is turned to ON - 1242 miles (2,000 km) before
these deadlines and reappears every 124 miles (200 km). Below 124 miles (200 km) servicing
indications are more frequent. The indication will appear in miles or kilometers according to
the ⬙Unit Of Measurement⬙ settings. When the next scheduled service is approaching and
the key is turned to ON, the word Service will appear on the display, followed by the number of miles or kilometers left. Contact a dedicated authorized dealership. The operations in
the “Scheduled Servicing Plan” will be performed and the message will be reset.
5
148 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Service Stop/Start System Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Stop/Start System Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Stop/Start system is not functioning properly and
service is required.
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
Electric Park Brake Fail Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Park Brake Fail Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Electric Park Brake is not functioning properly and
that service is required. Contact your authorized dealership.
5
Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light
This light will illuminate when there is a malfunction in one of the exterior bulbs.
150 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch
is turned to the AVV/START position. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously
with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily
each time the ignition switch is turned to AVV/START.
• Each time the ignition is turned to AVV/START, the ESC system will be ON, even if it
was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused
the ESC activation.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
5
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster arrow will flash independently for the left or right turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up (right).
152 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control has been set to a certain speed.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
White Telltale Indicator Lights
Cruise Control On Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control On Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control has been enabled by the driver.
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control
lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to
switch the headlights back to low beam. If the driver’s door is open, and the headlights or
park lights are left on, the high beam indicator light will remain illuminated.
5
SAFETY
CONTENTS
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features . . . . . .164
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . .156
▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) . . .157
▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Brake System Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . . .157
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) . . . . . .176 6
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . .157
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . .158
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . .161
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . .161
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . .163
▫ Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) . . . . . . . . . .164
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . .164
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
156 SAFETY
BRAKE SYSTEM
WARNING! (Continued)
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses
normal capability, the remaining system will still function. However, there will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident by increased
pedal travel during application and greater pedal force
required to slow or stop the vehicle. In addition, if the
malfunction is caused by a leak in the hydraulic system,
the “Brake Warning Light” will turn on as the brake
fluid level drops in the master cylinder.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required
to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that
required with the power system operating.
WARNING!
• Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in
abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive
(Continued)
lining wear, and possible brake damage. You
would not have your full braking capacity in an
emergency.
• Driving a vehicle with the “Brake Warning Light”
on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance or vehicle stability during braking
may occur. It will take you longer to stop the
vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle
checked immediately.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start
Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems
work together to enhance both vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
SAFETY 157
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent
overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability,
and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before
the front axle.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake
system is not functioning properly and that immediate
service is required. If the “Brake System Warning Light”
does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position, have the light repaired as soon as
possible.
braking conditions. The system automatically prevents
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a
slight clicking sound as well as some related motor
noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system 6
detects one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks,
loose debris, or panic stops may increase the likelihood
of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS
activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
• Brake pedal pulsations.
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the
stop.
158 SAFETY
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase braking or steering efficiency beyond
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modification may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn
on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
System Warning Light” is not on.
SAFETY 159
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous
braking pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake
pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from
a complete stop while on an incline. If the driver
releases the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will
continue to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If
the driver does not apply the throttle before this time
expires, the system will release brake pressure and the
vehicle will roll down the hill as normal.
6
160 SAFETY
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA
to activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear;
vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the transmission
is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with
a manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA
will remain active.
WARNING! (Continued)
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the
vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision or serious
personal injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, proceed as follows:
WARNING!
• For vehicles equipped with the instrument cluster
display, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in the “Multimedia” section for
further information.
(Continued)
SAFETY 161
For vehicles not equipped with the instrument cluster
display, perform the following steps:
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature
to its previous setting.
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
Traction Control System (TCS)
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
turn to the left.
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower
switch bank below the climate control four times
within twenty seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator
Light” should turn on and turn off two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional slightly more than one-half turn to the
right.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS
may apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s)
and/or reduce engine power to provide enhanced
acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake
Limited Differential (BLD), functions similar to a lim- 6
ited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across
a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning
faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of
the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque
to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may
remain enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced
mode.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist
in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.
Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
162 SAFETY
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the
actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does
not match the intended path, ESC applies the brake of
the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon
as the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when the TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as
little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE: The ESC Off switch is located below the radio
screen.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section), has been disabled and
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated.
When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system
is reduced.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the
conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of
(Continued)
SAFETY 163
WARNING! (Continued)
an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the handling
characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the performance of the ESC system.
Changes to the steering system, suspension, braking system, tire type and size or wheel size may
adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the
effectiveness of the ESC system can increase the
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the
rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s
speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it
then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers;
it cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects
or other vehicles.
NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full
Off” mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)” in this section for a complete explana- 6
tion of the available ESC modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
164 SAFETY
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the ESC and
EPS modules that provides torque at the steering wheel
for certain driving conditions in which the ESC module
is detecting vehicle instability. The torque that the
steering wheel receives is only meant to help the driver
realize optimal steering behavior in order to reach/
maintain vehicle stability. The only notification the
driver receives that the feature is active is the torque
applied to the steering wheel.
• Seat Belt Systems
NOTE: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through small
torques on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of the DST feature is highly dependent on the
driver’s sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied
torque. It is very important to realize that this feature
will not steer the vehicle, meaning the driver is still
responsible for steering the vehicle.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask
your authorized dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in
this section for further information).
SAFETY 165
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints” in this
section for further information) should be secured in
a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do
not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster
seats should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front air
bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between occupants and the door and occupants
could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, refer to
the “Customer Assistance” section for customer service contact information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag
can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor
driver and could cause a collision that includes you.
This can happen far away from home or on your own
street.
6
166 SAFETY
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking
the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle
should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The Belt Alert
feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is
first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will
signal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front
seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on
until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is
unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light
and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert
warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts are
buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their
seat belts.
SAFETY 167
Change Of Status
Lap/Shoulder Belts
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
belts are buckled again.
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other
items are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or
when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend
deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on
until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you
under normal conditions. However, in a collision the
seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle. 6
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
(Continued)
168 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including
the driver, should always wear their seat belts
whether or not an air bag is also provided at their
seating position to minimize the risk of severe
injury or death in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions
to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your
passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into
one another in a collision, hurting one another
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be
at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly.
In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure
the seat belt is flat against your body, without
twists. If you can’t straighten a seat belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion
could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt
into the buckle nearest you.
(Continued)
(Continued)
badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt
for more than one person, no matter what their
size.
WARNING!
SAFETY 169
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces
of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and
neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can
cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as
shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your
shoulder so that your strongest bones will take
the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are
more likely to hit your head in a collision if you
do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and
shoulder belt are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must
be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or
modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for
vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch
plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat
belt to go around your lap.
6
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
170 SAFETY
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Positioning The Lap Belt
SAFETY 171
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the 6
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180
degrees to create a fold that begins immediately
above the latch plate.
Releasing The Seat Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the
top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer
twisted.
172 SAFETY
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that serves you
best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
Adjustable Anchorage Down
Adjustable Anchorage Up
SAFETY 173
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the
upward position without pushing or squeezing the
release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is
latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions
to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your
passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder
belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
6
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
174 SAFETY
Seat Belt Pretensioner
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the
seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint
system. For additional information, refer to “Installing
Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the
“Child Restraints” section of this manual. The figure
below illustrates the locking feature for each seating
position.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped with an Energy
Management feature that may help further reduce the
risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt
system has a retractor assembly that is designed to
release webbing in a controlled manner.
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
SAFETY 175
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this
feature. Children 12 years old and under should always
be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag
can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
(Continued)
6
176 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or
children who are using booster seats. The locked
mode is only used to install rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child.
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask
your authorized dealer.
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag Warning Light
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever
the ignition switch is in the START or ACC/
ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in
the STOP/OFF/LOCK position, the air bag system is
not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses
power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
SAFETY 177
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is in the
ACC/ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air
Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a
malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the
Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system.
The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
WARNING!
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first in the ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four
to eight-second interval.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your
protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bag
system to protect you in a collision. If the light does
not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is
first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle,
or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
6
178 SAFETY
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the
instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition,
a single chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on and a fault has
been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
comes on intermittently or remains on while driving
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. For additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light, refer to “Warning/
Indicator Lights And Messages” in “Getting to Know
Your Instrument Panel” section of this manual.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts
for both the driver and front passenger. The front air
bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems.
The driver front air bag is mounted in the center of the
steering wheel. The passenger front air bag is mounted
in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment.
The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed
on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air
Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
SAFETY 179
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front air bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel
or instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag
can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of
collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the
front impact sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during
an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low
energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher
energy output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or
front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects
whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is
buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust
the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based
upon seat position.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You
(Continued)
6
180 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
may damage the air bags and you could be
injured because the air bags may no longer be
functional. The protective covers for the air bag
cushions are designed to open only when the air
bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you
have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air
bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear,
side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not
deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for example,
some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset
collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location
of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air
bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
SAFETY 181
Knee Impact Bolsters
Supplemental Side Air Bags
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front
occupants for improved interaction with the front air
bags.
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air
bags:
WARNING!
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
6
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below
the steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air
Bag provides enhanced protection during a frontal
impact by working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and front air bags.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover
events, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
182 SAFETY
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating
SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at
a very high speed and with such a high force that it
could injure occupants if they are not seated properly,
or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects
could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SAFETY 183
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a
deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in
certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in
addition to the injury reduction potential provided by
the seat belts and body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of
the trim out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
• Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or
other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering above the
side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from
any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do
not install any accessory items in your vehicle
which could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof
racks that require permanent attachments (bolts
or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do
not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any
reason.
6
184 SAFETY
The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or
not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including
children, should never lean on or sleep against
the door, side windows, or area where the side air
bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child
restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear
their seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
SAFETY 185
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that
require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left
side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a
right side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air
bags deploy.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment
of the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is
appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision.
Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of
whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.
The rollover sensing system determines if a rollover 6
event may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a
rollover or near rollover event, and deployment of the
Side Air Bags is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both
sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
186 SAFETY
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags,
any or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air
bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to
friction rope burns or those you might get sliding
along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not
caused by contact with chemicals. They are not
permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if
you haven’t healed significantly within a few days,
or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate
the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
SAFETY 187
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s
instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
air bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air
bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt
retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized
dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact,
depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will
determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident
Response System perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
or until the hazard light button is pressed. The 6
hazard lights can be deactivated by pressing the
hazard light button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long
as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the
intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response
System.
• Unlock the power door locks.
• Turn off the Fuel Pump Heater (if equipped).
• Turn off the HVAC Blower Motor.
• Close the HVAC Circulation Door.
188 SAFETY
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
After the event occurs, when the system is active, a
message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the
ignition switch from ignition AVV/START or MAR/
ACC/ON/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine.
Depending on the nature of the event the left and right
turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may
both be blinking and will continue to blink. In order to
move your vehicle to the side of the road, you must
follow the system reset procedure.
Customer Action
Customer Will See
NOTE: Each step MUST BE held for at least two
seconds
1. Turn ignition STOP/
OFF/LOCK. (Turn Signal Must be placed in
Neutral State).
Customer Action
Customer Will See
NOTE: Each step MUST BE held for at least two
seconds
2. Turn ignition MAR/
Right turn light BLINKS.
ACC/ON/RUN.
Left turn light is OFF.
3. Turn right turn signal
Right turn light is ON
switch ON.
SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
4. Place turn signal in
Right turn light is OFF.
neutral state.
Left turn light BLINKS.
5. Turn left turn signal
Right turn light BLINKS.
switch ON.
Left turn light is ON
SOLID.
6. Place turn signal in
Right turn light BLINKS.
neutral state.
Left turn light is OFF.
7. Turn right turn signal
Right turn light is ON
switch ON.
SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
8. Place turn signal in
Right turn light is OFF.
neutral state.
Left turn light BLINKS.
9. Turn left turn signal
Right turn light is ON
switch ON.
SOLID.
SAFETY 189
Customer Action
Customer Will See
NOTE: Each step MUST BE held for at least two
seconds
Left turn light is ON
SOLID.
10. Turn left turn signal
Right turn light is OFF.
switch OFF. (Turn Signal Left turn light is OFF.
Switch Must be placed
in Neutral State).
11. Turn ignition STOP/
OFF/LOCK.
System is now reset and
12. Turn ignition MAR/
ACC/ON/RUN. (Entire
the engine may be
started.
sequence needs to be
completed within one
minute or sequence will
need to be repeated).
Turn hazard flashers
OFF (Manually).
If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60
seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the
reset procedure must be performed again in order to be
successful.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or
the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running
boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag
system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or
may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat,
including your trim cover and cushion, needs to
(Continued)
6
190 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
be serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact your
authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this
vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded
by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
SAFETY 191
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to
crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured or killed. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the
child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety 6
Standards. You should also make sure that you can
install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For
additional
information,
refer
to
www.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm or call: 1–888–
327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: http://
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedriverschildsafety-index-53.htm
192 SAFETY
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large for Child
Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight or
Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not
reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Children who are at least two
years old or who have out-grown
the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown
their forward-facing child restraint,
but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
Recommended Type of Child
Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing
rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint
with a five-point Harness, facing
forward in the rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and
the vehicle seat belt, seated in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
reach either the height or weight limit of their rearfacing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can
be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
SAFETY 193
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag
can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height 6
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat
belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent
over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is
against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat
are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
(Continued)
194 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle,
do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle
seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it
in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave
it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder
belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to
bend over the front of the seat when their back is
against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear
seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the
child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then
the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle.
If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat
belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is
latched. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face
or neck, move the child closer to the center of the
vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on
the child correctly.
SAFETY 195
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under
an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder
belt will not protect a child properly, which may
result in serious injury or death. A child must
always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of
the seat belt correctly.
(Continued)
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH –
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors
Tether Anchor
Only
+ Top Tether
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
6
196 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In
these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with
the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint.
Please see the following table for more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints
In This Vehicle
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets
the seatback and one top tether anchorage located
behind the seating position. These anchorages are used
to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using
the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may
LATCH Positions
•
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
SAFETY 197
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
weight of the child restraint) for using the
combined weight of the child and the child
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
restraint?
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH anchorage system once the combined weight is
more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
be used together to attach a rear-facing or
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint.
forward-facing child restraint?
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center
No
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install
position using the inner LATCH lower ana child seat in the center seating position.
chorage?
Can two child restraints be attached using a
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two
common lower LATCH anchorage?
or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower
anchorages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position next to a
child seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
6
198 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the
back of the front passenger seat?
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
The head restraints may be removed in every rear seating position.
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage
symbols on the seatback. They are just visible
when you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Lower Anchorage Location
SAFETY 199
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of
the seat.
some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at
the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way
to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH :
WARNING!
Tether Anchorage Locations
• Do not install a child restraint in the center
position using the LATCH system. This position
is not approved for installing child seats using the
LATCH attachments. You must use the seat belt
and tether anchor to install a child seat in the
center seating position.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach
more than one child restraint. Please refer to “To
Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint” for
typical installation instructions.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the
lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to
the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
6
200 SAFETY
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be
moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to
the top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage”
for directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR)
Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they
play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor.
Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint
and out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt
interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of
buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
SAFETY 201
through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it.
Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the
vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they
should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they
to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure
a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are 6
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the
seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the
ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is
pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic
Locking Mode” description in “Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractors (ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint
Systems” for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
202 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
weight + weight of the child reusing the seat belt to install a forstraint) for using the Tether Anchor
ward facing child restraint, up to
with the seat belt to attach a forthe recommended weight limit of
ward facing child restraint?
the child restraint.
SAFETY 203
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
Can the rear-facing child restraint
Yes
Contact between the front passentouch the back of the front passenger seat and the child restraint is
ger seat?
allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be reYes
The head restraints can be removed
moved?
in every rear seating position.
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
seating position with an ALR retractor.
path of the child restraint?
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure
a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
6
204 SAFETY
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need
to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to
get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward
and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move
it to its rear-most position to make room for the child
seat. You may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part
of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means
the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the
tether strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
SAFETY 205
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage:
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of
approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no
top tether anchorage for that seating position, move
the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if
one is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
6
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint
and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the
head restraint and pass the tether strap around the
outboard side of the head restraint.
206 SAFETY
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint
top tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Tether Anchorage Locations
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your
pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and
possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic
braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY 207
SAFETY TIPS
Exhaust Gas
Transporting Passengers
NOTE: Never transport passengers in the cargo area.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and
can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
(CO), follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER
switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the
recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set
the blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.
6
208 SAFETY
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the
vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect
the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas
for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned
parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit
exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment.
In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the
vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as
required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent
retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question
regarding seat belt or retractor condition, replace the
seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an
authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the
Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay
on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving, have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Safety” for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should be
able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See
your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
SAFETY 209
Floor Mat Safety Information
WARNING! (Continued)
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS securely attach
your floor mat using
the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your
floor mat upside down or turn your floor mat
over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using
the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
before installing
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE
any other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an
additional floor mat on top of an existing floor
mat.
(Continued)
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be
properly attached and secured to your vehicle. If a
floor mat needs to be replaced, only use a FCA
approved floor mat for the specific make, model,
and year of your vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for interference,
with the vehicle properly parked with the engine
off, fully depress the accelerator, the brake, and
the clutch pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and place
the floor mat in your trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
into the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle
is moving. Objects can become trapped under
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could
cause a loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
6
210 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat
(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could
change the position of the floor mat and may
cause interference with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and reinstalled, always properly attach carpet to the
floor and check the floor mat fasteners are secure
to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to
check for interference with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
always check your floor mat has been properly
installed and is secured to your vehicle using the
floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights
and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check
turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the
instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if
gasoline fumes are detected, or if fuel or brake fluid
leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and
corrected immediately.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING THE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
▫ Shifting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
▫ Tip Start Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
▫ Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
▫ Extended Park Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
▫ After Starting — Warming Up The Engine . . .217
▫ Stopping The Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
▫ Turbocharger “Cool Down” — If Equipped . .217
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . .217
䡵 ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . .218
▫ Auto Park Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ SafeHold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
▫ Brake Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
▫ Gear Selector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 7
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
▫ Transmission Limp Home Mode . . . . . . . . . .235
▫ Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System. . .236
䡵 SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .236
▫ Activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
▫ Setting A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
▫ Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
▫ Resume Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
212 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Varying The Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
▫ Service The Rear Park Assist System . . . . . . .250
▫ Accelerating For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . .250
䡵 ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED .239
䡵 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .252
䡵 DYNAMIC SELECTOR — IF EQUIPPED . . . . .239
▫ LaneSense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
▫ Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
▫ Turning LaneSense On Or Off. . . . . . . . . . . .252
䡵 BRAKE CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .240
▫ LaneSense Warning Message. . . . . . . . . . . . .253
▫ Brake Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
▫ Changing LaneSense Status . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Turning Brake Control On Or Off . . . . . . . . .242
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
▫ Changing Brake Control Sensitivity . . . . . . . .243
▫ Brake Control Limited Warning. . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Service Brake Control Warning . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Precautions While Driving With Brake
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
▫ 1.4L Turbo Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
▫ 2.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . .249
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
STARTING AND OPERATING 213
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . .264
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications . . . .264
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . .266
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . .271
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . .271
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle .285
7
214 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Manual Transmission
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
Proceed as follows:
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ON or RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the NEUTRAL
or PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to
any driving range.
1. Set the Electric Park Brake (EPB) and put the gear
selector in the NEUTRAL position.
2. Press the clutch pedal to the floor, without pressing
the accelerator.
3. Cycle the ignition to the START mode and release it
as soon as the engine is started.
4. If the engine does not start, place the ignition in the
OFF mode and wait 10-15 seconds before attempting
to restart the engine.
Automatic Transmission
Proceed as follows:
1. Set the Electric Park Brake (EPB) and put the gear
selector in the PARK or NEUTRAL position.
2. Press on the brake pedal, without pressing the accelerator.
3. Cycle the ignition to the START mode and release it
as soon as the engine is started.
STARTING AND OPERATING 215
4. If the engine does not start, place the ignition in the
OFF mode and wait 10-15 seconds before attempting
to restart the engine.
RUN mode, release the accelerator pedal and repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
Tip Start Feature
Do not press the accelerator. Cycle the ignition switch
briefly to the START mode and release it. The starter
motor will continue to run but will automatically disengage when the engine is running.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
⬙Normal Starting⬙ or ⬙Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedure, and has not experienced an extended park condition as identified in ⬙Extended Park Starting⬙ procedure
it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the
way to the floor and hold it there. Crank the engine for
no more than 15 seconds. This should clear any excess
fuel in case the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt
to start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter
and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done
improperly. Refer to “Jump-Starting” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
7
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at
a time. Wait 60 seconds before trying again.
Cold Weather Operation
To ensure reliable starting under extreme cold conditions an externally powered electric block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is required for the
1.4L Turbo engine below -20°F (-29°C) and for the 2.4L
engine below -31°F (-35°C) and is recommended for the
2.4L engine below -20°F (-29°C).
To prevent possible engine damage while starting at
low temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking when the ambient temperature is less than -20°F
(-29°C) for the 1.4L Turbo engine, and -31°F (-35°C) for
the 2.4L engine, and the oil temperature sensor reading
indicates an engine block heater has not been used. The
message “plug in engine heater” will be displayed in
the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is
below -4°F (-20°C) at the time the engine is shut off as a
reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold
start.
Extended Park Starting
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the
battery to ensure a full battery charge during the
crank cycle.
2. Cycle the ignition to the START mode and release it
when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 to 15 seconds,
cycle the ignition to the OFF mode, wait five seconds
to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the Extended
Park Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat
the procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
After Starting — Warming Up The Engine
Proceed as follows:
• Travel slowly, letting the engine run at a reduced
RPM, without accelerating suddenly.
• It is recommended to wait until the engine coolant
temperature gauge starts to rise for maximum performance.
Stopping The Engine
To shut off the engine with vehicle speed greater than
5 mph (8 km/h), you must push and hold the ignition
or push the START/STOP button three times consecutively within a few seconds. The engine will shut down,
and the ignition will be placed in the RUN position.
Turning OFF the car (cycle the ignition from the RUN
mode to the OFF mode), the power supply to the
accessories are maintained for a period of three minutes.
Opening the driver side door with the ignition in RUN
will sound a short chime that reminds the driver to
place the ignition to OFF.
When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the window
switches remains active for three minutes. Opening a
front door will cancel this function.
After severe driving, idle the engine to allow the
temperature inside the engine compartment to cool
before shutting off the engine.
Turbocharger “Cool Down” — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump to cool
the turbocharger after the engine is shut off. Depending
on the type of driving and the amount of cargo, the 7
pump will run for up to 10 minutes after the engine has
been shut off to circulate coolant through the turbocharger. Although the pump is rubber-mounted for
quiet operation, it is normal to hear it running during
this time.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine
and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
For the recommended viscosity and quality grades,
refer to “Dealer Service” in “Servicing And Maintenance”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral
Oil in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as a problem.
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Park Brake
System (EPB) that offers simple operation, and some
additional features that make the parking brake more
convenient and useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the
vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is applied.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
The EPB switch is located in the center console.
You can engage the EPB in two ways;
• Manually, by pulling up on the park brake switch
momentarily to apply.
• Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake
feature in the customer programmable features section of the Uconnect Settings.
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
NOTE: The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB
switch is held for longer than 20 seconds in either the
released or applied position. The light will extinguish
upon releasing the switch.
Electric Park Brake Switch
To apply the EPB manually, pull up on the switch
momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound
from the back of the vehicle while the EPB engages.
Once the parking brake is fully engaged, the BRAKE
warning lamp in the instrument cluster and an indicator on the switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the
brake pedal while you apply the EPB, you may notice a
small amount of brake pedal movement. The EPB can
be applied even when the ignition switch is in the OFF
mode but the BRAKE warning lamp will not illuminate,
however, it can only be released when the ignition is in
the RUN mode.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the EPB will
automatically engage whenever the transmission is
placed into PARK, or with a manual transmission, when
the ignition switch is in the STOP/OFF position. If your
foot is on the brake pedal, you may notice a small
amount of brake pedal movement while the EPB is
engaging.
7
The EPB will be automatically released if the driver’s
seat belt is buckled and driver’s intention to start (in
forward or reverse direction) is recognized by the
system
To release the EPB manually, the ignition must be in the
RUN mode. Put your foot on the brake pedal, then push
the EPB switch down momentarily. You may hear a
slight whirring sound from the back of the vehicle while
the parking brake disengages. You may also notice a
small amount of movement in the brake pedal. Once the
EPB is fully disengaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in
the instrument cluster and the LED indicator on the
switch will extinguish.
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply
the EPB before placing the gear selector in PARK,
otherwise the load on the transmission locking
mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear
selector out of PARK. The EPB should always be
applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
• If the clutch pedal is released at the same time the gas
pedal is pressed, the EPB will be automatically
released (manual transmissions only).
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the transmission gear selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ON or RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission
in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary
to engage the EPB while the vehicle is in motion,
maintain upward pressure on the EPB switch for as
long as engagement is desired. The brake warning lamp
could illuminate in case of the hydraulic system is not
available. The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated
automatically while the vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the EPB while the vehicle is in motion,
release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a complete stop using the EPB, when the vehicle reaches
approximately 1.9 mph (3 km/h) the EPB will remain
engaged.
WARNING!
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged, or repeated use of the parking brake to slow
the vehicle may cause serious damage to the brake
system. Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to
brake failure and a collision.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB
system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate. This
may be accompanied by the Brake warning lamp flashing. In this status some EPB functionalities may be
deactivated. In this event, urgent service of the EPB
system is required. Do not rely on the EPB to hold the
vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The EPB can be programmed to be applied automatically whenever the vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph
(3 km/h) and the automatic transmission is placed in
PARK, or with a manual transmission, whenever the
ignition is in the OFF mode. Auto Park Brake is enabled 7
and disabled by customer selection through the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect
Settings.
Any single Auto Park Brake application can be bypassed by pushing the EPB switch to the release position while the transmission is placed in PARK (automatic transmission) and the ignition is in the RUN
mode. In some cases, in case of Automatic or Dual
clutch transmission, when the ignition is in the OFF
mode EPB can automatically apply even if it has been
previously disabled
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system that will
engage the park brake automatically if the vehicle is left
unsecured while the ignition switch is in the RUN mode.
For automatic transmissions, the EPB will automatically
engage if all of the following conditions are met:
• Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h).
• There is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal.
• The seat belt is unbuckled.
• The driver door is open.
• The vehicle is not in the PARK position.
For manual transmissions, the EPB will automatically
engage if all of the following conditions are met:
• Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h).
• There is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal.
• The clutch pedal is not pressed.
• The seat belt is unbuckled.
• The driver door is open.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing the
EPB Switch while the driver door is open and the brake
pedal is pressed. Once manually bypassed, SafeHold
will be enabled again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph
(20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled to the OFF mode and
back to RUN mode.
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by your
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for
which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. You should only enter Brake Service Mode during
brake service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary
for you or your technician to push the rear piston into
the rear caliper bore. With the electric park brake
system, this can only be done after retracting the EPB
actuator. The actuator retraction can be done easily by
entering the Brake Service Mode through the Uconnect
Settings in your vehicle. This menu based system will
guide you through the steps necessary to retract the
EPB actuator in order to perform rear brake service.
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
Service Mode has requirements that must be met in
order to be activated:
• The vehicle must be at a standstill.
• The parking brake must be disabled.
• The transmission must be in park or neutral.
• The EPB switch not activated.
• The ignition is in the ON mode.
• The brake pedal not pressed.
While in service mode, the EPB fault lamp will flash
continuously while the ignition is cycled ON.
NOTE: A dedicated message will appear in the instrument cluster if Brake Service Mode cannot be activated.
When brake service work is complete, the following
steps must be followed to reset the parking brake
system to normal operation:
• Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
• Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
• Apply the EPB Switch.
NOTE: A dedicated message will appear in the instrument cluster if Brake Service Mode cannot be deactivated.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle, especially on an incline.
7
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch
pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with
the clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause
abnormal wear on the clutch.
NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience increased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid
warms up. This is normal.
To shift the gears, press the clutch pedal to the floor and
put the gear selector to the desired position (the diagram for the engagement of the gears is displayed on
the handle of the lever).
REVERSE Ring
To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL position
lift the REVERSE ring, located below the knob and
simultaneously move the lever to the left and then
forward.
Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As
you release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal.
You should always use first gear when starting from a
standing position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel
economy and performance, it should be upshifted as
listed in the recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the
All Engines
vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily
loaded or pulling a trailer, these recommended up-shift
speeds may not apply.
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Gear Selection
2 to 3
3 to 4
4 to 5
Accel.
24 (39)
34 (55)
47 (76)
Cruise
19 (31)
27 (43)
37 (60)
NOTE: A certain amount of noise from the transmission
is normal. This noise can be most noticeable when the
vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged
(clutch pedal released), but it may also be heard when
driving. The noise may also be more noticeable when
the transmission is warm. This noise is normal and is
not an indication of a problem with your clutch or
transmission.
Downshifting
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is
recommended to preserve brakes when driving down
5 to 6
56 (90)
41 (66)
steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time
provides better acceleration when you desire to resume 7
speed. Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to
avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on
a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip, and the vehicle could skid.
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Skipping gears and downshifting into lower
gears at higher vehicle speeds can damage the
engine and clutch systems, Any attempt to shift
into lower gear with clutch pedal depressed may
result damage to the clutch system. Shifting into
lower gear and releasing the clutch may result in
engine damage.
• When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding
the engine which can cause engine damage,
and/or clutch damage, even if the clutch pedal is
pressed. If transfer case is in low range the vehicle
speeds to cause engine and clutch damage are
significantly lower.
• Failure to follow the maximum recommended
downshifting speeds may cause the engine damage and/or damage the clutch, even if the clutch
pedal is pressed.
• Descending a hill in low range with clutch pedal
depressed could result in clutch damage.
(Continued)
Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the maximum recommended
downshifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed and/or damage the clutch disc, even if the
clutch pedal is pressed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
Gear Selection
Maximum
Speed
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
6 to 5
5 to 4
4 to 3
3 to 2
80 (129)
70 (113)
50 (81)
30 (48)
CAUTION!
If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift
at too high of a vehicle speed, these conditions may
cause the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is
selected and the clutch pedal is released. Damage to
the clutch and the transmission can result from
skipping a gear while downshifting or downshifting at too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch
pedal is held pressed (i.e., not released).
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art, fuel
efficient nine-speed transmission.
2 to 1
15 (24)
The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both
beside the gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To
select a gear range, press the lock button on the gear
selector and move the lever rearward or forward. You
must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission
out of PARK, or NEUTRAL when the vehicle is stopped
7
or moving at low speeds). Select the DRIVE range for
normal driving.
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine
is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come
to a complete stop, then apply the parking brake,
shift the transmission into PARK, and turn the
ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ON or RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Gear Selector
The transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (+/-) shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift
control. Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the AutoStick position (beside the
DRIVE position) will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
NOTE:
• If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed
forward) it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position
(beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the
transmission gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster without the ⬙D⬙ indicator (i.e. as 1, 2, 3, etc.
rather than D1, D2, D3, etc.). Move the gear selector
to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
• In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector
position and the actual transmission gear (for example, driver selects REVERSE while driving forward), the position indicator will blink continuously
until the selector is returned to the proper position, or
the requested shift can be completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its 7
shift schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental and road conditions. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts
on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a
normal condition, and precision shifts will develop
within a few hundred miles (kilometers).
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
The nine-speed transmission has been developed to
meet the needs of current and future FWD/AWD
vehicles. Software and calibration is refined to optimize
the customer’s driving experience and fuel economy. By
design, some vehicle and driveline combinations utilize
9th gear only in very specific driving situations and
conditions.
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
CAUTION!
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is
cold.
Gear Ranges
PARK (P)
This range supplements the Electric Park Brake (EPB)
by locking the transmission. The engine can be started
in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the
vehicle is in motion. Apply the EPB when exiting the
vehicle in this range.
Gear Selector Lock Button
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the EPB.
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
When parking on a hill, apply the EPB before shifting
the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
WARNING! (Continued)
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against
vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the engine OFF.
• Remove the key fob.
WARNING!
7
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ON or RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out
of PARK, you must turn the ignition to the
ON/RUN mode, and also press the brake pedal.
Otherwise, damage to the gear selector could
result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have properly engaged the transmission into the
PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on
the gear selector, and firmly move the gear selector
all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is
not blinking.
• With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift
into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine
may be started in this range. Apply the electric park
brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must
exit the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
can cause severe transmission damage. Refer to
“Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating”
and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head
winds or while towing a heavy trailer), use the
AutoStick shift control (refer to “AutoStick” in this
section for further information) to select a lower gear.
Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the transmission controller may modify the 7
transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque,
and/or expand the range of torque converter clutch
engagement. This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the “Transmission Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate
and the transmission may operate differently until the
transmission cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature
improves warm up time of the engine and transmission
to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
torque converter clutch, and shifts into 8th or 9th gear,
are inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm.
Normal operation will resume once the transmission
temperature has risen to a suitable level.
NOTE: In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only
shift up or down when the driver moves the gear
selector rearward (+) or forward (-), except as described
below.
AutoStick
• The transmission will automatically upshift when
necessary to prevent engine overspeed.
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
can also provide you with more control during passing,
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing and many other situations.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick position
(beside the DRIVE position), it can be moved forward
and rearward. This allows the driver to manually select
the transmission gear being used. Moving the gear
selector forward (-) triggers a downshift, and rearward
(+) an upshift. The current gear is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to
first or second gear (depending on model) when
coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver should
manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle
is accelerated.
• You can start out (from a stop) in first or second gear.
Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snow or
icy conditions. Tap the gear selector forward or
rearward to select the desired gear after the vehicle is
brought to a stop.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
overspeed, that shift will not occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged because the transmission will not shift automatically.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector
to the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the
AutoStick position at any time without taking your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on
a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision
or personal injury.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is electronically monitored for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that
could result in transmission damage, Transmission
Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the
transmission may operate only in a fixed gear, or may
remain in NEUTRAL. The Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode may
allow the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer
for service without damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing
the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. An authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to assess the condition of your
transmission. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required.
7
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock, which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the ignition can be turned to the OFF mode. This
helps the driver avoid inadvertently exiting the vehicle
without placing the transmission in PARK. This system
also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the
ignition is in the OFF mode.
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side
of the steering wheel.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission
Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode (engine running or
not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed before pushing
the button on the gear selector to shift from NEUTRAL
into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or
moving at low speeds.
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
Speed Control Buttons
1 — On/Off
2 — SET+/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET-/Decel
5 — CANC/Cancel
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down if
multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the
same time. If this occurs, the Speed Control System can
be reactivated by pushing the Speed Control on/off
button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
Activation
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Control.
The cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster
display will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the
on/off button a second time. The cruise indicator light
will turn off. The system should be turned off when not
in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in
use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the
system or cause it to go faster than you want. You
could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
Setting A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pushing the SET (+)
or SET (-) button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push
the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected
speed.
Deactivation
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC
button, ESC intervention, brake control mitigation, electronic park brake intervention, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Speed
Control without erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or turning the ignition
switch to STOP erases the set speed from memory.
Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
Varying The Speed
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed
by pushing the SET (+) button.
7
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect system if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for more information. The
speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect system if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for more information. The
speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a
1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
• If the button is continually pushed, the speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a
1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
• If the button is continually pushed, the speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
Accelerating For Passing
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed
by pushing the SET (-) button.
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides on-demand All-Wheel Drive
(AWD). The system is automatic with no driver inputs
or additional driving skills required. Under normal
driving conditions, the front wheels provide most of the
traction. If the front wheels begin to lose traction, power
is shifted automatically to the rear wheels. The greater
the front wheel traction loss, the greater the power
transfer to the rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle
input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will
be sent to the rear in a pre-emptive effort to improve
vehicle launch and performance characteristics.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
DYNAMIC SELECTOR — IF EQUIPPED
The Dynamic Selector combines the capabilities of the
vehicle control systems, along with driver input, to
provide the best performance in all driving conditions.
7
Dynamic Selector Switch
The Dynamic Selector consists of the following positions:
Auto Mode – This mode is designed for comfort and
safety in normal driving conditions. In versions
equipped with all-wheel drive, this mode also reduces
fuel consumption by automatically altering the distribution of torque between the front and rear axle.
All Weather Mode – This mode offers increased traction control and stability control for low traction conditions such as driving on a dirt road or off road as well
as wet and slippery roads.
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
Sport Mode – This mode is designed to increase
steering feedback to the driver with a slight increase in
effort and changes the transmission shift schedules for
more aggressive shifting. This driving mode is useful
while driving on twisty roads where more steering
precision is desired in spirited cornering.
Warning Messages
In the event of a system fault, the system automatically
defaults to ⬙Auto⬙ mode and a message will appear in
the instrument cluster display.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
BRAKE CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
Brake Control
The Brake Control system with mitigation provides the
driver with audible warnings, visual warnings (within
the instrument cluster display), and may apply a brake
jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential
frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are
intended to provide the driver with enough time to
react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
• Brake Control monitors the information from the
forward looking sensors as well as the Electronic
Brake Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of
a forward collision. When the system determines that
a forward collision is probable, the driver will be
provided with audible and visual warnings and may
provide a brake jerk warning.
• If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide a
limited level of active braking to help slow the
vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision.
If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and
the system determines that the driver intends to
avoid the collision by braking but has not applied
sufficient brake force, the system will compensate
and provide additional brake force as required.
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
Vehicles With A Manual Transmission: After the end
of the intervention of automatic braking, the engine
could stall, unless the driver can depress the clutch
pedal.
Vehicles With Automatic Transmission: After the end
of the intervention of automatic braking, the transmission may remain in last gear stored: therefore the car
could lurch forward, once the brakes release a few
seconds later. If the Brake Control event stops the
vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle at
standstill for two seconds and then release the brakes.
If a Brake Control event begins at a speed below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the system may provide the maximum
braking possible to mitigate the potential forward collision. If the Brake Control event stops the vehicle
completely, the system will hold the vehicle at standstill
for two seconds and then release the brakes.
7
Brake Control Message
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle
in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for Brake Control activation is
4 mph (7 km/h).
• The maximum speed for Brake Control activation is
124 mph (200 km/h).
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The Brake Control alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts
based on the course prediction. This is expected and
is a part of normal Brake Control activation and
functionality.
• The Brake Control system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the Brake
Control system should be deactivated to prevent
unnecessary warnings to the surroundings.
• The active braking is enabled only if the front seat
belts are fastened.
WARNING!
Brake Control is not intended to avoid a collision
on its own, nor can Brake Control detect every type
of potential collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle
via braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Turning Brake Control On Or Off
The Brake Control menu setting is located in the
Uconnect settings.
NOTE: The default status of Brake Control is “Warning
+ Active Braking.” This allows the system to warn you
of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you
and enable the active braking.
• Changing the Brake Control status to “Off” deactivates the system, so no warning or active braking
will be available in case of a possible collision
• Changing the Brake Control status to “Only Warning” prevents the system from providing limited
active braking, or additional brake support if the
driver is not braking adequately in the event of a
potential frontal collision, but maintains the audible
and visual warnings.
Changing the status of the system is only possible with
the vehicle at a complete stop.
NOTE: The Brake Control system state is not kept in
memory from one key cycle to the next. If the system is
turned off, it will turn on when the vehicle is restarted.
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
Changing Brake Control Sensitivity
By changing the settings on the menu of the Uconnect
system, you can change the sensitivity of the system by
choosing one of the following three options: ⬙Near⬙,
⬙Medium⬙ or ⬙Far⬙. Refer to “Multimedia” for further
information.
The default option is ⬙Medium⬙. This setting provides
that the system notify the driver of a possible accident
with the vehicle ahead of it when the latter is at a
standard distance, intermediate between the other two
possible settings.
By setting the sensitivity of the system to ⬙Far⬙, the
system will warn the driver of a possible accident with
the vehicle in front when the latter is at a greater
distance, giving you the chance to act on the brakes in
a more limited and gradual. This setting gives the
driver the maximum possible time of reaction to prevent a possible accident.
By changing the option to ⬙Near⬙, the system will warn
the driver of a possible accident with the vehicle ahead
of it when the latter is a reduced distance. This setting
offers a reaction time to the driver lower than the
settings ⬙Medium⬙ and ⬙Far⬙, in the case of a potential
accident, while a more dynamic driving of the car.
The setting of the sensitivity of the system is maintained
in memory when the engine is switched off.
Brake Control Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster display will read “Brake Control Limited Functionality” or “Brake Control Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield” momentarily,
there may be a condition that limits Brake Control
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, the active braking may not be
fully available. Once the condition that limited the
system performance is no longer present, the system 7
will return to its full performance state. If the problem
persists, see your authorized dealer.
Service Brake Control Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
display displays:
• Brake Control Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” Warning
The “Brake Control Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Blocked” warning will display when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This most often occurs
at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain.
The system may also become temporarily blinded due
to obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases,
the instrument cluster display will display “Brake Control Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked” and the
system will deactivate.
The “Brake Control Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Blocked” message can sometimes be displayed while
driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with
reflective tiles, or ice and snow). The system will
recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare
conditions, when the radar is not tracking any vehicles
or objects in its path this warning may temporarily
occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal
of an obstruction. The sensor is located behind the
lower grille. In absence of visible obstructions on the
bumper, it could be necessary to wipe off the radar
directly on the surface, after having the radar cover
removed. It’s recommended that your authorized
dealer perform’s this operation.
NOTE:
• If the “Brake Control Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain,
mud, or other obstruction, have the radar sensor
realigned at your authorized dealer.
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
Brake Control operation.
Precautions While Driving With Brake Control
In certain driving conditions, such as:
• Driving in the vicinity of a curve
• Small vehicles and/or not aligned to the lane
• Lane changing of other vehicles
• Passing of vehicles in an oncoming intersection
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
The intervention of the system could be unexpected or
delayed. The driver must therefore always pay particular attention, while maintaining control of the car to
drive in complete safety.
Driving In The Vicinity Of A Curve
Entering or exiting a large curve, the system could
detect the presence of a vehicle that is in front of the car,
but that does not preside in the same lane. In cases such
as this, the system might respond.
Small Vehicles And/Or Not Aligned To The Lane
The system is not able to detect the presence of vehicles
that are in front of the car but placed outside the field of
action of the radar sensor and could therefore not react
in the presence of small vehicles such as bicycles or
motorcycles.
7
Small Vehicles And/Or Not Aligned To The Lane
Driving In The Vicinity Of A Curve
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
Lane Changing Of Other Vehicles
Passing Of Vehicles In An Oncoming Intersection
Vehicles that suddenly change lane, while standing in
the traffic lane of their car and inside the field of action
of the radar sensor may cause the intervention of the
system.
The system could temporarily react to a vehicle that
crossed the range of the radar sensor, in an oncoming
intersection.
Passing Of Vehicles In An Oncoming Intersection
Lane Changing Of Other Vehicles
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense System
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition
7
is changed to RUN mode.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is
in REVERSE.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
ParkSense Sensors
Chime
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 59
inches (150 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location, type
and orientation of the obstacle.
By shifting the vehicle in REVERSE and in the case of
the presence of a rear obstacle, an acoustic signal that
varies with the distance of the obstacle from the bumper
is activated.
The frequency of the acoustic signal:
• Increases with the distance between car and object
decreases.
• Becomes continuous when the distance that separates the car from the obstacle is less than approximately 12 inches (30 cm), while terminates immediately if the distance to the obstacle increases.
• Remains constant if the distance between car and
obstacle remains unchanged. If this situation occurs
for the side sensors, the signal is stopped after
approximately three seconds to avoid, for example, it
activates in case of maneuver along a wall.
Parking Sensors
When the system emits a beeping sound, the volume of
the Uconnect system, if turned on, is automatically
lowered by ParkSense.
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
Detection Distances
If the sensors detect more obstacles, it is taken into
account only what is the shorter distance.
Instrument Cluster Display
ParkSense is displayed on the instrument cluster only if
you have selected the item ⬙Sound And Display⬙ inside
the ⬙Settings⬙ menu of the Uconnect system.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show
the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound
tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
In general, the car is closest to the obstacle when the
display shows only a flashing arc and the chime becomes continuous.
The color on the display depends on the distance and
location of the obstacle.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense switch.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for
approximately five seconds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the 7
gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is
disabled, the instrument cluster display will show the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle
is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense
is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch
LED will be off when the system is enabled. If the
ParkSense switch is pushed, and requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then
the LED will be on.
ParkSense will remember the previous state when the
vehicle is switch off.
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After turning the ignition to STOP, the ParkSense
remains in this setting until the next key cycle. This
is true even in the case of changing the ignition
from RUN to STOP, and then again to RUN.
Service The Rear Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display a dedicated message
such as “PARK ASSIST UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS” or the “PARK ASSIST UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information. When the gear selector
is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a
faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will
display a dedicated message such as ⬙PARK ASSIST
UNAVAILABLE
WIPE
REAR
SENSORS⬙
or
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Under this condition, Rear Park Assist will not operate.
If a message such as “PARK ASSIST UNAVAILABLE
WIPE REAR SENSORS” appears in the instrument
cluster display, make sure the outer surface and the
underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear
of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstructions, and then
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear,
see an authorized dealer.
If a message such as “PARK ASSIST UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” appears in the instrument cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of
the rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud,
dirt or other obstruction to keep the Rear ParkSense
system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations
could affect the performance of Rear ParkSense.
• Clean the Rear ParkSense sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The Rear ParkSense system might
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the fascia/bumper.
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be
placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so
can result in the system misinterpreting a close object
as a sensor problem, causing a failure indication to be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the
sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
7
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must
continue to pay attention to your surroundings.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
(Continued)
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense.
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
If it’s necessary to keep the trailer hitch and hitch ball
assembly mounted for a long period, it is possible to
filter out the trailer hitch and hitch ball assembly
presence in sensor field of view. The filtering operation
must be performed only by an authorized dealer.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The
LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to
detect lane markings and measure vehicle position
within the lane boundaries.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the
driver unintentionally drifts across the lane marking
(no turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides
a visual warning through the instrument cluster display
to prompt the driver to remain within the lane. When
only a single lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque)
warning will not be provided.
NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are
on the steering wheel and provides an audible warning
to the driver when the driver’s hands are not detected
on the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the
driver does not return their hands to the wheel.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel
to prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out
of the lane, the LaneSense system provides a visual
warning through the instrument cluster display to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
Turning LaneSense On Or Off
The driver may manually override the haptic warning
by applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense
button once.
The default status of LaneSense is “off”.
The LaneSense button is located on the end of the turn
signal stalk, located on the left side of the steering
column.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the
LaneSense button once. A “Lane Sense On”
message is shown in the instrument cluster display.
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system state on or off from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to RUN mode.
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane
drift condition through the instrument cluster display.
Base Instrument Cluster Display
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines are
gray when both of the lane boundaries have not been
detected and the LaneSense indicator is solid white.
System On (Gray Lines/White Indicator)
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense
indicator is solid white when only the left lane
marking has been detected and the system is ready to
provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster
display if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin line
remains solid yellow and the LaneSense indicator
7
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual
warnings in the instrument cluster display and a
torque warning in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift
situation, the left thick lane line and left thin line turn
solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from
solid green to solid yellow. At this time torque is
applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow
Thin Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left
thin line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow.
At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in
the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity of the torque warning and the warning zone
sensitivity (early/late) that you can configure through
the Uconnect system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE:
• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph 7
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
• The system will not apply torque to the steering
wheel whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock
brakes, traction control system, electronic stability
control, forward collision warning, etc.).
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to
see an on-screen image of your vehicle’s rear surroundings when the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The
image will be displayed on the touchscreen display
along with a note to “check entire surroundings” across
the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will
disappear. The ParkView camera is located above the
rear license plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
camera delay turned off), the rear camera mode is
exited and the navigation or audio screen appears
again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
camera delay turned on), the camera image will continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting
out of REVERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the
ignition is switched to STOP mode.
A touchscreen button to disable the camera is available
when the vehicle is not in REVERSE. Display of the
camera image after shifting out of REVERSE can be
disabled via Uconnect Settings.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected backup path based on the steering wheel
position.
When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
Parking Camera
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear
of the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
The following table shows the approximate distances
for each zone:
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing
up. You are responsible for the safety of your
surroundings and must continue to pay attention
while backing up. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently
over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
7
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold tire pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (6.5° C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires –
General Information” in “Maintaining And Caring For
Your Vehicle” for information on how to properly
inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also
increase as the vehicle is driven, this is normal and there
should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects,
or natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold tire pressure on the placard. Once the low tire
pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to
the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system
will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives
the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of 30 psi
(207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68° F (20° C) and
the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20° F (-7° C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 23 psi (159 kPa). This tire pressure is
sufficiently low enough to turn on the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa),
but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be
on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the
vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure value.
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels
can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire
sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable.
After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function
checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
7
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire
pressure in the tire.
Base System
This is the TPMS warning indicator located in
the instrument cluster.
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure
levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the
valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module.
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster, an acoustic signal will be
activated, and the “Check left or right front/rear tire” text
message will display when one or more of the four active
road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you should
stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of
each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. The
system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Light will extinguish once the updated tire
pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to
receive this information.
Check TPMS Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system
fault is detected, an audible chime will be activated and the
“Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System” text message
will display. If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will
repeat providing the system fault still exists. The Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the
fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur
with any of the following scenarios:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
• Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact
spare wheel and tire assembly.
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
• The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not
monitor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
• If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure
warning limit, upon the next ignition cycle, a chime
will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will still turn ON due to the low tire.
• However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid.
• This occurs for each subsequent ignition cycle, a
chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid.
• Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact
spare tire, the TPMS will update automatically and
the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn
OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the lowpressure warning limit in any of the four active road
tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and 7
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
2.4L Engine
1.4L Turbo Engine
This engine is designed to meet all
emission regulations and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and performance when using high-quality
unleaded ⬙regular⬙ gasoline having
an octane rating of 87 using the
(R+M)/2 method. For optimum performance and fuel economy the use of 91 octane or
higher is recommended.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is
not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience
these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before
considering service for the vehicle.
All available gasoline engines are
designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel
economy and performance when using high quality unleaded “regular”
gasoline having a octane rating of 87
using the (R+M)/2 method. The use
of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not
provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these
engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is
not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience
these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before
considering service for the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and
are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide
improved performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Use of these blends may result in starting and
drivability problems, damage critical fuel system
components, cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Please observe pump
labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel
contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing
methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and may void or not be covered under New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
7
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
MMT In Gasoline
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Methylcyclopentadienyl
Manganese
Tricarbonyl
(MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive
that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane.
Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance
advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your
vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be
indicated on the gasoline pump, therefore, you should
ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may
result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel
system components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion, and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines
that have these additives will help improve fuel
economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
Designated TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline contains a higher level of
detergents to further aide in minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When available, the usage of
Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com
for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials intended
for gum and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine
performance and damage the emissions control
system.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
7
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
ADDING FUEL
The Capless Fuel System uses a flapper placed at the
filler pipe of the fuel tank; it opens and closes automatically upon insertion/extraction of the fuel nozzle.
The Capless Fuel System is designed so that it prevents
the filling of an incorrect type of fuel.
Opening The Door
For filling, proceed as follows:
1. Open the door, by pushing and releasing on the
indentation point indicated by the arrow.
Fuel Filler Door
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
2. Insert the fuel nozzle in the filler pipe and proceed
with filling the fuel tank.
Emergency Refueling Procedure
If the vehicle is out of fuel, proceed as follows:
1. Open the liftgate and remove the emergency fuel fill
funnel located in the cargo area.
7
Filler Pipe
3. Before removing the nozzle, wait at least 10 seconds
to allow the fuel to flow inside of the tank.
4. Pull the nozzle from the filler pipe and then close the
door.
Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Insert the emergency fuel fill funnel in the filler pipe
and proceed to fill the fuel tank.
Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel — If Equipped With Full
Size Spare Tire
2. Open the fuel door.
Fueling With Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel
4. Remove the emergency fuel fill funnel, and close the
door.
5. Store the emergency fuel fill funnel in the cargo area.
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
WARNING!
• Do not affix objects/plugs to the end of the filler
neck other than is provided on the car.
• The use of objects/plugs do not comply with the
vehicle and may cause pressure increases inside
the tank, creating dangerous conditions.
• Do not approach the neck of the tank with open
flames or lit cigarettes its an extreme fire hazard.
Also, avoid close contact with the filler pipe with
your face, do not inhale harmful vapors.
• Do not use your mobile phone in the vicinity of
the pump fuel nozzle, it can be a possible risk of
fire.
(MDH) number is included on this label and indicates
the Month, Day and Hour of manufacture. The bar code
that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle, options
and cargo. The label also specifies maximum capacities
of front and rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must
be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not
exceeded.
Payload
VEHICLE LOADING
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable
load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of
the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Certification Label
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification
label affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the
front and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the
cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not
exceeded.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in
the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
7
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
components sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability does not necessarily increase the
vehicle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement
tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle
for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle
fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants
or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle
on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for
operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been
exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the
vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure
that the load is properly distributed over the front and
rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the
GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR.
If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to
front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down low and be
sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all
loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and
the way the brakes operate.
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for
a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning, and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:
• Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
• Slow down if the road has standing water or
7
puddles.
• Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
• Keep tires properly inflated.
• Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in
a sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around
you.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles
in the way before driving through the standing
water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not
continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further
damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving.
If the electric steering system experiences a fault that
reduces assist or prevents the vehicle from providing
assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle
manually.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should
be obtained as soon as possible.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING⬙ OR
⬙POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE 7
SYSTEM” message and a steering wheel icon
are displayed on the instrument cluster
screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to
the dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has lost
power steering assistance. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Common Towing Definitions
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds
and during parking maneuvers.
The following trailer towing related definitions will
assist you in understanding the following information:
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer
for service.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in
this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do
not exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/
Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of
all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or
temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Frontal Area
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and
rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear
axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either
front or rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by
the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on
the hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as
part of the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Sway Control — Mechanical
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer
tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any
unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball
or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These
kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market
today and they are commonly used to tow small and
medium sized trailers.
7
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to
the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions,
it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway
control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and
trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for
heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be required
depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/loading
to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing
Hitch system may reduce handling, stability,
braking performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with
your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable
Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class
can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting
the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
7
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
1.4L Turbo Engine & 2.4 FWD
Trailer towing is not recommended.
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)
Max. Tongue Wt. (See Note)
2.4L AWD
1,000 lbs (450 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo
and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire
Safety Information” in “Maintaining And Caring For Your Vehicle” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information”
placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recom7
mended:
WARNING!
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow
these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe
as possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that it will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic
load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the
driver to control. You could lose control of your
vehicle and have a collision.
(Continued)
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or
damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission,
steering, suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and
allow enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission
in PARK. Always block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer
wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following
four ratings are not exceeded:
(Continued)
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500
miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The
engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
Towing Requirements — Tires
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the
trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and
possible personal injury.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the proper
tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a
higher load carrying capacity will not increase the
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped
with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an
electronic brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
7
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for
additional space between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could
result in a collision.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring (If Equipped)
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are
required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved
trailer harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
• Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
before launching a boat (or any other device plugged
into vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.
• Be sure to reconnect after clear from water area.
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
7
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
AutoStick
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
• When using the AutoStick shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate performance
and avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose
“5” if the desired speed can be maintained. Choose
“4” or “3” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent
shifting when towing. However, if frequent shifting
does occur while in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick
shift control to manually select a lower gear.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary to avoid extended driving at high RPM.
Return to a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade
and road conditions allow.
Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience
speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads
to maximize fuel efficiency.
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
Cooling System
Highway Driving
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
City Driving
Turn off temporarily.
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle
speed.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
7
TOWING CONDITION
Flat Tow
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
WHEELS OFF THE
GROUND
NONE
REAR
FRONT
ALL
FRONT WHEEL DRIVE
(FWD)
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
BEST METHOD
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE
(AWD)
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOTE: When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake
feature is disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid
inadvertent Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto
Park Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the
Customer Programmable Features in the Uconnect Settings.
Recreational Towing
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front
wheels are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished
using a tow dolly (front wheels off the ground) or
vehicle trailer (all four wheels off the ground). If using
a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
• Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
• Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
• Apply the Electric Park Brake (EPB). Place the transmission in PARK. Turn the engine OFF.
• Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
• Cycle the ignition to the RUN mode, but do not start
the engine.
• Press and hold the brake pedal.
• Release the Electric Park Brake (EPB).
• Cycle the ignition OFF, remove the key fob, and
release the brake pedal.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires
towing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF the
ground.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released,
and remains released, while being towed.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the
ground, or using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED.
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer
provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . .291
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
▫ Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Replacing Exterior Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Replacing Interior Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
▫ Access To The Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
▫ Tire Service Kit — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .325
䡵 JUMP STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
▫ Preparations For Jump Start . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
▫ Jump Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
▫ Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution
Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
䡵 REFUELING IN EMERGENCY . . . . . . . . . . . .331
▫ Body Computer Fuse Center. . . . . . . . . . . . .313
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . .331
▫ Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit. . . .315
䡵 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . .332
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . .316
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . .334
8
290 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . .335
▫ Rear Tow Eye Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
▫ Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models . . . . . . . . .336
䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models . . . . . . . . . .337
䡵 TOW EYE USAGE — IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . .337
▫ Front Tow Eye Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . . . . . . . . .340
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 291
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
BULB REPLACEMENT
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
switch bank below the radio.
General Information
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second
time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in OFF mode.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
• Before you replace a bulb, check the contacts to be
sure they are not oxidized.
• Replace the bulbs with the same type and wattage.
• After replacing a light bulb, always check the correct
orientation.
• Before replacing a bulb that is not functioning, check
that the fuse is intact.
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmo- 8
spheric conditions change to allow the condensation to
change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will
usually accelerate the clearing process.
292 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Lamps
Front Courtesy Light
Front Courtesy Lights (Sun Visors)
Rear Dome Light (Models Without Retractable Roof)
Rear Interior Lights (Models With Retractable Roof)
Interior Lights
Dome Light (Glove Compartment)
Bulb Number
C5W
C5W
C5W
C5W
W5W
W5W
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps
Low Beam/High Beam Headlamps
Front Position/Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
Front Direction Indicator Lamps
Front Fog Lamps
Side Indicators (Side View Mirror)
Tail/Brake Lights/Turn Indicators
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
Reverse
License Plate Lamp
Bulb Number
HIR2
P21/5
PY21W
H8
WY5W
P21W
LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
P21W
W5W
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 293
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Hi/Lo Beam Light Halogen
Headlamps
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Open the engine compartment and remove the headlamp bulb cap.
8
Front Lamps
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Headlamps
Daytime Running Lamps
Directional Indicators
Fog Lamps — If Equipped
Headlamp Bulb Cap
294 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Rotate the headlamp bulb socket counterclockwise
then pull outwards.
3. Release the locking tab on the headlamp bulb connector and remove the bulb and socket.
Headlamp Bulb Socket
Headlamp Bulb Connector
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 295
4. Install the new headlamp bulb making sure it is
properly locked.
Position Lights/Daytime Running Lights/Fog Lights
5. Install the headlamp bulb and socket; align the tabs
and turn it clockwise making sure it is properly
locked.
1. Turn the front wheels completely.
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
2. Use a suitable tool to remove the access door.
8
Headlamp Bulb Connector
WARNING!
Carry out the operation of replacing lamps only
with the engine off. Also make sure that the engine
is cold, to avoid the danger of burns.
Position Light/Daytime Running Light/Fog light Access
1 — Screws
2 — Access Door
296 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Remove the electrical connectors.
4. Rotate in a counterclockwise direction and remove
the bulb and bulb socket.
Bulb and Socket Assembly
1 — Bulb
2 — Rotate Bulb
Position Light/Daytime Running Light Assembly
1 — DRL Bulb Socket
2 — Turn Signal Bulb Socket
6. Insert the new bulb by pushing on it and turning it
clockwise. Make sure the bulb is correctly locked in
place.
5. To replace the bulb gently push bulb and rotate
counterclockwise.
7. Install the bulb and sockets and rotate them clockwise, making sure that it is properly locked.
8. Reconnect the electrical connectors.
9. Reinstall the access door.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 297
Front Fog Lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
3. By pushing the electrical connector tab remove the
electrical connector.
1. Turn the front wheels completely.
2. Use a suitable tool to remove the access door.
8
Fog Light Assembly
4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise, and then replace
the bulb.
Position Light/Daytime Running Light/Fog Light
Access
1 — Screws
2 — Access Door
5. Insert the new bulb in the socket, making sure the
bulb is locked into place.
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. Reinstall the access door.
298 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Side Indicators on External Rear View Mirrors – If
Equipped
CAUTION!
The procedure is described as a guideline. For the
replacement of the lamp it is recommended that you
contact your authorized dealer.
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:
1. Remove the mirror cap on the outside rear view
mirror.
Mirror Cap
1 — Mirror Cover
2 — Side Indicator Lens
3 — Side Indicator Bulb Location
2. Remove the transparent lens assembly as shown.
3. Remove the bulb socket and bulb from the transparent lens assembly by rotating the socket counterclockwise.
4. Remove the bulb from the bulb socket by pulling the
bulb straight out.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 299
5. Insert the new bulb, making sure that it is locked into
place
6. Reinstall the socket in to the transparent lens assembly.
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Using a suitable tool remove the tail lamp housing
screws as shown.
7. Reinstall the cover on the outside rear view mirror,
making sure it is locked into place.
Rear Tail Lamps
Contain the following:
• Position lights
• Stop lights
8
• Direction indicator
• REVERSE lights
Tail Lamp Removal
300 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Remove the rear tail lamp, sliding it toward the
outside as shown.
4. Remove the screws and remove the rear tail lamp
holder.
Tail Lamp Removal
Rear Lamp Assembly
1 — Screws
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 301
5. Replace the bulb as necessary.
9. Secure the rear tail lamp and reconnect the electrical
connector.
10. Finally close the liftgate.
3th Stop Lamp
The CHMSL is LED. For their replacement see your
authorized dealer.
License Plate Lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Using a suitable tool remove the license plate lens.
8
Rear Tail Lamp Holder
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Running/Stop Lamp
Direction Indicator Bulb
Running/Stop Lamp
Reverse Bulb
6. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is properly
locked.
7. Reassemble the lamp assembly on the rear tail lamp
housing, tightening the screws.
8. Reposition the rear tail lamp on the vehicle.
License Plate Light Location
302 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Replacing Interior Bulbs
Front Courtesy Light
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Using a suitable tool remove the front courtesy light
as shown.
License Plate Light
2. Remove the bulbs from the individual side contacts.
3. Insert the new bulbs, and ensure that they are
properly locked between the contacts.
4. Reinstall the license plate lens.
NOTE: If removal the license plate lens using a suitable
tool, be sure to cover the tip of the suitable with a cloth
so no damage is done to the lenses or the vehicle paint.
Front Courtesy Light Housing
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 303
2. Release the retainer clips and bulb housing as shown.
3. Replace the bulbs by pulling straight out of bulb
housing.
8
Front Courtesy Bulb Housing
1 — Retaining Clips
2 — Bulb Housing
Front Courtesy Bulb Housing
4. Insert the new bulbs, making sure that they are
properly locked.
5. Reassemble the bulb housing and courtesy light
housing making sure that they are properly locked.
6. Install the front courtesy light making sure that it is
properly locked.
304 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Dome Light Vanity Mirror
Dome Light Glove Compartment
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:
1. Lift the cover of the mirror and pull out the visor
mirror light cover.
1. Open the glove compartment.
2. Replace the bulb, releasing it from the side contacts,
and then insert the new bulb, making sure that it is
properly locked between the contacts.
2. Place your fingers inside the light assembly, pull the
bulb to replace it.
Bulb Removal/Installation
Visor Mirror Cover
3. Reinstall the visor mirror light cover making sure
that it is properly locked.
4. Finally lower the visor mirror cover to the mirror.
3. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is properly
locked.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 305
Rear Dome Light — Without Retractable Roof
Dome Light
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Using a suitable tool release the lamp assembly at
both the ends.
1. Lower the handle in the direction shown remove the
dome light.
2. Open the flap and replace the bulb.
8
Retractable Roof Light
Rear Dome Light
3. Insert the new bulb, locking it between the contacts.
4. Reinstall the dome light.
306 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Replace the bulb by removing it from the side
contacts.
Interior Cargo Lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Open the luggage compartment and remove the
dome light assembly.
2. Open the light cover and replace the bulb.
Bulb
3. Insert the new bulb, locking it between the contacts.
4. Reinstall the dome light.
Light Cover
3. Close the light cover over the bulb.
4. Reinstall the dome light in its correct position.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 307
WARNING!
• Before proceeding with the replacement of the
lamp wait for the exhaust pipes are cool: DANGER OF BURNS!
• Modifications or repair of the electrical system
performed incorrectly and without taking into
account the technical characteristics can cause
malfunctions with the risk of fire.
• Halogen lamps contain gas under pressure, in the
event of breakage be careful of the projection of
fragments of glass.
• Halogen lamps must be handled by touching only
the metallic part. If the transparent bulb is in
contact with the fingers, reduces the intensity of
the emitted light and you can also affect the life of
the lamp. In case of accidental contact, rub the
bulb with a cloth dampened with alcohol and
allow to dry.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an
appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any
other material. Failure to use proper fuses may
result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are
switched off and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
8
308 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
General Information
Fuse Removal
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive
current.
To replace a fuse use the extractor attached to the fuse
cover (located on the inside of the engine compartment
fuse cover.
When a device does not work, you must check the
electrical circuit inside the fuse for a break/melt.
Also please be aware that when using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result
in vehicle battery discharge.
Fuse Extractor Location
Blade Fuses
1 — Electrical Circuit
2 — Blade Fuse With Good Electrical Circuit
3 — Blade Fuse With Bad Electrical Circuit
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 309
Access To The Fuses
The fuses are grouped into four controllers located in
the engine compartment, under the instrument panel
and on the inside of the left side cargo trim panel.
Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution Unit
The engine compartment fuse panel is located on the
left side of the engine compartment.
Fuse Panel And Cover Location
1 — Mounting Screw
2 — Fuse Cover
Removing Fuse Cover and Locking Screw
Proceed as follows:
Engine Compartment Fuse Cavities
1. Slowly turn the screw counterclockwise.
2. Slowly release the screw.
3. Remove the fuse cover by sliding it upward.
8
310 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Mounting Fuse Cover and Locking Screw
Proceed as follows:
1. Properly secure the fuse cover to the box, slide
completely from top to bottom.
2. Fully depress the screw, using the special screwdriver supplied.
3. Slowly turn the screw clockwise.
4. Release the screw.
Battery Fuse Cover Location
1 — Fuse Cover Tabs
2 — Fuse Cover
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 311
Cavity
F01
F02
Maxi Fuse
70 Amp Tan
60 Amp Blue
Cartage Fuse
–
–
Mini Fuse
–
–
F03
–
20 Amp Blue
–
F04
F05
F06
F07
F08
F09
F10
F11
F14
F15
F16
–
70 Amp Tan
20 Amp Yellow
50 Amp Red
–
–
–
–
–
40 Amp Orange
–
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
5 Amp Tan
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
5 Amp Tan
–
5 Amp Tan
F17
–
–
F18
–
–
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
30 Amp Green
Description
Module Body Computer
Module Body Computer, Rear Distribution Units
Controller Power Supply Body Computer
Brake Control Electronics Module
Electric Power-Assisted Steering
Engine Cooling fan
Engine Cooling fan
Automatic Transmission, GSM
Control Module Engine
Horn
Supply Secondary Loads
Pump Power ⬙After run⬙
Brake Control Module Pump
Engine Control Module Power, Automatic Transmission
Supply Primary Loads (1.4L)
Supply Primary Loads (2.4L)
Power All-Wheel Drive
8
312 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
Maxi Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
Cartage Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
F24
–
–
Mini Fuse
7.5 Amp Brown
5 Amp Tan
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yelow
20 Amp Yellow
(Customer Installed)
15 Amp Blue
F30
F83
F84
F87
F88
F89
F90
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
40 Amp Green
–
–
–
30 Amp Pink
–
30 Amp Green
–
20 Amp Yellow
5 Amp Tan
7.5 Amp Brown
–
5 Amp Tan
Description
Air Conditioner Compressor
Electronic Power Four-Wheel Drive
Fuel Pump
Power Control Module Engine
Power Outlet (Battery Powered)
Electronic Unit Supply Automatic
Transmission
Heated Windshield – If Equipped
Air Conditioning Fan
Power Outlet (Ignition Powered)
Gear Selector Automatic Transmission
Heated Outside Mirrors
Heated Rear Window
IBS Sensor (Battery State of Charge)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 313
Body Computer Fuse Center
The controller is located at the left side of the steering
column at the bottom of the instrument panel.
For the fuse replacement see your authorized dealer.
8
Body Controller Fuse Cavities
314 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity
F31
F33
F34
F36
Mini Fuse
7.5 Amp Brown
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
F37
10 Amp Red
F38
F42
F43
F47
F48
F49
20 Amp Yellow
7.5 Amp Brown
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
7.5 Amp Brown
F50
F51
7.5 Amp Brown
7.5 Amp Brown
F53
7.5 Amp Brown
Description
Fan Air Conditioning, Power Socket
Power Window Front (Passenger Side)
Power Window Front (Driver’s Side)
Supply Uconnect System, Air Conditioning, USB Port, Rear lateral ceiling light
in case of open roof, EOBD port
System Power Forward Collision Warning Plus, All Wheel Drive (AWD), IPC,
Central stack switches, Brake Pedal Switch (NC)
Central Locking
BSM - Brake Control Module, EPS - Electric Power-Assisted Steering
Bi-directional Pump Washer
Power Rear Window (Driver Side)
Power Rear Window (Passenger Side)
Supply ParkSense, Spot Lights Front Dome, Internal Electocromic Mirror,
Heated Front Seats
Supply Air Bag
Air Conditioning Compressor, Plaque Automatic Transmission, Rear Camera,
Air Conditioning, LDW - Lane Departure Warning, ASS - Auxiliary Stack
Switch, DSU - Drive Syle Selector Unit, Reverse gear switch, side mirrors and
rear window defrost
Supply IPC/Starter Device/System Keyless Enter-N-Go, Brake Pedal Switch
(NA), EPB - Electric Parking Brake
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 315
Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit
To access the fuses, remove the access door from the left
rear panel of the rear cargo area.
Push on the left side of the access door to unhinge and
remove.
8
Rear Cargo Fuse Cavities
Access Door Location
Cavity
F2
F3
F5
F6
F8
Mini Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
30 Amp Green
7.5 Amp Brown
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Audio System
Electric Sunroof
Power Seat (driver side)
Power Seat (driver side) Lumbar Adjustment
Heating Front Seats
316 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never put any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used
to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface
only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage — If
Equipped
The jack and tools are located in the rear storage
compartment if equipped, inside a special container.
Jack And Tools Location
1. Open the liftgate.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 317
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.
Load Floor Handle
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
Spare Tire Fastener
8
318 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Remove the jack, wheel bolt wrench, and wheel
chocks.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare
tire in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat)
tire repaired or replaced immediately.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or
slippery areas.
Jack And Tools
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
Wheel Bolt Wrench
Jack
Emergency Funnel
Wheel Chock
Screwdriver
Emergency Allen Key
5. Remove the spare tire.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Apply the Electric Park Brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (automatic transmission) or REVERSE (manual transmission).
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 319
5. Turn the ignition to STOP mode.
WARNING! (Continued)
6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing the
right front tire, chock the left rear
wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
(Continued)
• Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Apply the parking brake and place an automatic
transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on
a jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on
a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to
a service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
8
320 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench
to loosen, but not remove the wheel bolts on the
wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench.
2. If equipped with wheels where the center cap covers
the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench to pry the
center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
Loosen The Wheel Bolt
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest
to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill
flange, centering the jack saddle inside the cutout in
the sill cladding.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 321
Jacking Locations
Front Jacking Engagement Point
8
Front Jacking Location
Rear Jacking Location
322 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if
the spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
Rear Jacking Engagement Point
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
Mounting Spare Tire
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 323
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact
spare tire or a limited — use spare tire. For further
information refer to “Tires — General Information”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install
a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
8. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the
wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the
wheel bolt wrench counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern
until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice.
Refer to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical Data”
for the proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service
station.
11. Securely stow the jack, tools, chocks and flat tire.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare
tire in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat)
tire repaired or replaced immediately.
8
324 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded
end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning
may result in serious injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern
until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer
to “Torque Specifications” in the “Technical Data”
section for the proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt
about the correct tightness, have them checked with
a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service
station.
5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel
chocks. Stow the jack and tools back in the proper
storage location. Release the Electric Park Brake
before driving the vehicle.
6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts
are properly seated against the wheel.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 325
TIRE SERVICE KIT STORAGE
Tire Service Kit — If Equipped
The Tire Service Kit is located in the rear storage
compartment inside a storage container. Located inside
the container are a screwdriver and the emergency fuel
funnel. To access the Tire Service Kit open the liftgate
and remove the load floor.
Tire Service Kit Components
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Power Plug (located on bottom side of Tire Service Kit)
Sealant Hose (Clear)
Power Button
Pressure Gauge
Sealant Bottle
Tire Service Kit Location
If a tire is punctured, you can make a first emergency
repair using the Tire Service Kit located in the rear
storage compartment inside the storage container.
Remove the Tire Service Kit from the vehicle, take it out
from the bag and place it near the punctured tire. Screw
the clear flexible filling tube to the tire valve.
8
326 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
• If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
• If the tire has any sidewall damage.
• If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
• If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
• If the wheel has any damage.
• If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat sources.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service
Kit in the place provided. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around
you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,
swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It
causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush
immediately with plenty of water if there is any
contact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon
as possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a
physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out
of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth
immediately with plenty of water and drink
plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult
a physician immediately.
(Continued)
Insert the power plug into the vehicle power outlet
socket. Start the vehicle engine.
Push the Tire Service Kit power button to the “I”
position. The electric compressor will be turned on,
sealant and air will inflate the tire.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 327
Minimum 26 psi (1.8 bar) of pressure should be reached
within 20 minutes. If the pressure has not been reached
turn off and remove the Tire Service Kit, drive the
vehicle 30 feet (10 meters) back and forth, to better
distribute the sealant inside the tire.
Attach the clear flexible filling tube of the compressor
directly to the tire valve and repeat the inflation process.
When the correct pressure has been reached, start
driving the vehicle to uniformly distribute the sealant
inside the tire. After 10 minutes, stop and check the tire
pressure. If the pressure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not
drive the vehicle, as the tire is too damaged, contact the
nearest authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced
after using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 65 mph
(110 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced.
Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you. Have the tire checked as soon as
possible at an authorized dealer.
If the pressure is at 19 psi (1.3 bar) or above repeat the
inflation process to reach the correct tire pressure and
8
continue driving.
Peel off the warning label from the bottle and place it on
the dashboard as a reminder to the driver that the tire
has been treated with Tire Service Kit.
WARNING!
The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get hot
after use, so it should be handled carefully.
328 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE: Replace the sealant canister prior to the expiration date at your authorized dealer.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be
jump-started using a set of jumper cables and a battery
in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section
carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
WARNING!
Store the sealant canister in its special compartment, away from sources of heat. Failure to follow
this WARNING may result in sealant canister rupture and serious injury or death.
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 329
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously
injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
Proceed as follows:
Battery Posts
1 — Positive Battery Post
2 — Negative Battery Post
NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the
positive battery post.
1. Apply the Electric Park Brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK (manual transmission in
NEUTRAL) and place the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
8
330 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery,
park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set
the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to
the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to
the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do not use any other exposed
metal parts.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 331
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when
not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
The fuel filling procedure in case of emergency is
described in the “Emergency Refueling Procedure”. 8
Refer to “Adding Fuel” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating your engine by taking the
appropriate action.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and charging
system inspected at your authorized dealer.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, put transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
332 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The
A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system
and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower
control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the gear
selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Apply the Electric Park Brake.
3. Carefully separate the gear selector bezel and boot
assembly from the center console.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 333
4. Push and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into
the gear selector override access hole (at the right
front corner of the gear selector assembly), and push
and hold the override release lever down.
Gear Selector Bezel Location
8
Gear Selector Override Location
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector bezel.
Removing Gear Selector Bezel
334 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. For vehicles with automatic transmission,
push and hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then
shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE
(with automatic transmission) or SECOND GEAR and
REVERSE (with manual transmission), while gently
pressing the accelerator.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
For Vehicles With Automatic Transmission:
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal
to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch (if necessary), to
place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in
⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control” in “Safety” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage,
or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may
lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in
NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five
(Continued)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 335
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a
stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE/ SECOND gear and REVERSE, do
not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h),
or drivetrain damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too
fast may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin
the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear
(no transmission shifting occurring).
(Continued)
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift Or
Dolly Tow
Flatbed
Wheels OFF
The Ground
NONE
Rear
Front
ALL
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
FWD MODELS
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and
other equipment designed for this purpose, following
equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety
chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing
device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to
ALL WHEEL DRIVE
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws
regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
8
336 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park
Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer
programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.
• Vehicles with a discharged battery or total electrical
failure when the Electric Park Brake (EPB) is engaged, will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the rear
wheels off the ground when moving the vehicle onto
a flatbed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the RUN
position.
NOTE: The Safehold feature will engage the Electric
Park Brake whenever the driver’s door is opened (if the
ignition is RUN, transmission is not in PARK, and brake
pedal is released). If you are towing this vehicle with
the ignition in the RUN position, you must manually
disable the Electric Park Brake each time the driver’s
door is opened, by pressing the brake pedal and then
releasing the EPB.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Gear Selector Override” in this
section for instructions on shifting the transmission out
of PARK so that the vehicle can be moved.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do
not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle
with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must
towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a
towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front
wheels raised).
NOTE: Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released,
and remains released, while being towed.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 337
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed, or with one end of the vehicle
raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
and/or power transfer unit damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
TOW EYE USAGE — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with a tow eye that can be
used to tow a disabled vehicle.
When using a tow eye be sure to follow the “Tow Eye
Usage Precautions” and the “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” instructions in this section.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its wheels
on the ground. Damage to the drivetrain will
result.
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal damage to the transmission or power transfer
unit will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used
when towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
(Continued)
Tow Eye
8
338 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Tow Eye Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the tow eye is properly seated and secure
in the mounting receptacle.
• The tow eye is recommended for use with an approved tow bar and or rope.
• Do not use the tow eye to pull the vehicle onto a
flatbed truck.
• Do not use the tow eye to free a stuck vehicle. Refer
to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in this section for further
information.
WARNING!
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow eyes.
• Do not use a chain with a tow eye. Chains may
break, causing serious injury or death.
• Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye. Tow straps
may break or become disengaged, causing serious
injury or death.
• Failure to follow proper tow eye usage may cause
components to break resulting in serious injury
or death.
Tow Eye Warning Label
CAUTION!
• The tow eye must be used exclusively for roadside assistance operations. Only use the tow eye
with an appropriate device in accordance with the
highway code (a rigid bar or rope) to flat tow the
vehicle for a short distance to the nearest service
location.
(Continued)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 339
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Tow eyes MUST NOT be used to tow vehicles off
the road or where there are obstacles.
• In compliance with the above conditions, towing
with a tow eye must take place with two vehicles
(one towing, the other towed) aligned as much as
possible along the same center line. Damage to
your vehicle may occur if these guidelines are not
followed.
Front Tow Eye Installation
The front tow eye receptacle is located behind a access
door, located on the right front bumper fascia. To install
the tow eye, open the access door using the vehicle key
or a small screwdriver, and thread the tow eye into the
receptacle.
Insert the wheel bolt wrench handle through the eye
and tighten, refer to “Jacking And Tire Changing” for
further information. The tow eye must be fully seated to
the attaching bracket through the lower front fascia as
shown. If the tow eye is not fully seated to the attaching
bracket, the vehicle should not be towed.
Front Tow Eye Installation
1 — Access Door
2 — Tow Eye
Rear Tow Eye Installation
The rear tow eye receptacle is located behind a access
door on the rear bumper fascia.
To install the tow eye, open the access door using the
vehicle key or a small screwdriver, and thread the tow
eye into the receptacle.
8
340 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Insert the wheel bolt wrench handle through the eye
and tighten, refer to “Jacking And Tire Changing” for
further information. The tow eye must be fully seated to
the attaching bracket through the lower rear fascia. If
the tow eye is not fully seated to the attaching bracket,
the vehicle should not be towed.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information on the Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data
that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle.
Rear Tow Eye Installation
1 — Access Door
2 — Tow Eye
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information on the Event Data
Recorder (EDR).
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
▫ Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO
ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L ENGINE . . .354
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . .355
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .359
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
▫ Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . .371 9
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . .371
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
䡵 RAISING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . .379
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . .382
342 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . .383
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . .384
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . .389
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . .397
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . .398
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . .391
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .393
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .399
䡵 STORING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 343
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition to the ON mode,
you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”
symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is
not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things
will happen:
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, or recently had a dead battery or a battery
replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail
the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check
if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do
the following:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON mode, but do not crank
or start the engine.
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you cycle the
ignition OFF or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully 9
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed
to the I/M station.
344 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive
your vehicle as you normally would in order for your
OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test
routine may then indicate that the system is now ready.
DEALER SERVICE
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station
can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the
engine running.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in
civil penalties being assessed against you.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the
designed performance. Damage or failures caused by
the use of parts which are not quality-equivalent to
genuine parts for maintenance and repairs will not be
covered by the manufacturer’s warranty.
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 345
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve
months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever
comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is
generally only a concern for fleet customers.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate in the instrument
cluster. This means that service is required for your
vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent shorttrips, trailer tow and extremely hot or cold ambient
temperatures will influence when the “Change Oil” or
“Oil Change Required” message is displayed. Severe
Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message
to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last
reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Severe Duty All Models
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change.
If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone
other than your authorized dealer, the message can be
reset by referring to the steps described under “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the
vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment
or is operated predominately at idle or only very low
engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered
Severe Duty.
NOTE: The Oil Change Indicator will not illuminate
under these conditions.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, and
brake master cylinder reservoir, and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
9
346 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Maintenance Chart
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
Check and adjust hand brake.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air filter if using in dusty or off-road
conditions.
Required Maintenance Intervals
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and hoses.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Check tire condition/wear and
adjust pressure, if necessary,
check TIREKIT expiration date
(if provided).
10,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
16,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
Refer to the “Maintenance Chart” on the following page
for the required maintenance intervals.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Check operation of lighting
system (headlamps, direction
indicators, hazard warning
lights, luggage compartment,
passenger compartment,
glove compartment, instrument panel warning lights,
etc.).
Check and, if necessary, top
up fluid levels (brakes/
hydraulic clutch, windshield
washer, battery, engine coolant, etc.).
Check engine control system
operation (via diagnostic tool).
1
32,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
10,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
16,000
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 347
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
9
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Visually inspect condition of:
exterior bodywork, underbody
protection, pipes and hoses
(exhaust - fuel system brakes), rubber elements
(boots, sleeves, bushings,
etc.).
Check windshield/rear window
wiper blade position/wear.
Check operation of windshield
washer system and adjust jets
if necessary.
Check cleanliness of hood
and tailgate locks and cleanliness and lubrication of linkages.
Visually check the condition
and wear of the front and rear
brakes.
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
10,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
16,000
348 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Check the front suspension,
tie rods, CV joints and replace
if necessary.
Visual inspect the condition of
the accessory drive belt.
Check the tension of the accessory drive belt.
Inspect and replace, if required, front end accessory
drive belt, tensioner, and, idler
pulley.
Inspect and replace PCV
valve if necessary.
Change engine oil and replace oil filter. *
Inspect the PTU fluid level.
Inspect the rear differential
fluid level.
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
10,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
16,000
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 349
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
9
•
•
In accordance with Oil Change Indicator System OR Severe Duty Mileage, whichever occurs
first.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Replace spark plugs (1.4L
Turbo engine). **
Replace spark plugs (2.4L
engine). **
Replace engine air filter. #
Replace brake fluid every two
years.
Replace cabin filter.
Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle
for any of the following: trailer
towing, heavy loading, taxi,
police, delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert operation or more than
50% of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot
weather, above 90°F (32°C).
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
10,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
16,000
350 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
○
•
•
•
○
•
•
•
○
•
•
•
○
•
•
○
•
•
○
•
•
○
•
○
•
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
10,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
16,000
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 351
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
Replace the timing belt (1.4L
Turbo Engine).
䡩 Recommend replacement
• Mandatory service
# The engine air cleaner should be inspected at every
oil change if used in dusty areas.
* The oil and oil filter replacement must be carried out
when indicated by a warning light or message on the
instrument panel, or in any case should not exceed 1
year or 10,000 miles (16,000 km).
•
•
•
** The spark plug change is distance based only, yearly
intervals do not apply. The following are essential to 9
ensure correct operation and prevent serious damage to
the engine:
• Only use spark plugs of the same make and type
which are specially certified for such engines (refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Technical Data” for further information).
• Strictly comply with the spark plug replacement
interval given in the “Maintenance Chart” for spark
plug replacement.
352 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
• Contact your authorized dealer if you have any
questions.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
If you have any doubt about your ability to
perform a service job, take your vehicle to a
competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance.
This could cause an accident.
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 353
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO ENGINE
9
1 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Oil Fill Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
5 — Battery
6 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
8 — Coolant Pressure Bottle Cap
9 — Coolant Pressure Bottle
354 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L ENGINE
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Engine Oil Fill Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
5 — Battery
6 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
8 — Coolant Pressure Bottle Cap
9 — Coolant Pressure Bottle
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 355
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
CAUTION! (Continued)
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed
your vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the
future.
your engine, transmission, or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in
these components as the chemicals can damage
(Continued)
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time
to check the engine oil level is approximately five
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not 9
check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat
overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is
cold will give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground,
and approximately five minutes after a fully warmed
engine is shut off, will improve the accuracy of the oil
level readings. Maintain the oil level between the range
markings on the dipstick. The safe range is indicated by
a crosshatch zone. Adding 1 quart (0.9 Liters) of oil
356 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
when the reading is at the low end of the indicated
range will result in the oil level at the full end of the
indicator range.
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine with oil. Overfilling the
engine with oil will cause oil aeration, which can
lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil
temperature. This loss of oil pressure and increased
oil temperature could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it
is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further
information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve
months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever
comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is
generally only a concern for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection — 1.4L Turbo Engine
For best performance and maximum protection for
turbocharged engines under all types of operating
conditions, the manufacturer recommends synthetic
engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12991.
Engine Oil Selection — 2.4L Engine
For best performance and maximum protection under
all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends 0W-20 engine oils that are API Certified
and meet the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 1.4L Turbo
Engine
Mopar SAE 5W-40 synthetic engine oil is recommended
for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves
low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy.
Your engine oil filler cap also states the recommended
engine oil viscosity grade for your engine.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 357
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.4L Engine
Engine Oil Filter
Mopar SAE 0W-20 engine oil is recommended for all
operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low
temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your
engine oil filler cap also states the recommended engine
oil viscosity grade for your engine.
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the
addition of any additives (other than leak detection
dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by
supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil
and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to
the environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how
and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. Mopar engine oil filters are
high quality oil filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
9
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.)
can provide a measure of protection in the case of
engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction
system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal
is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure
that no one is near the engine compartment before
(Continued)
358 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
starting the vehicle with the air induction system
(air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so
can result in serious personal injury.
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic
maintenance required.
acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area
immediately with large amounts of water. Refer
to “Jump Starting Procedures” in the “In Case Of
Emergency” section for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow
cable clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery
fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do
not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. Mopar engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
(Continued)
(Continued)
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 359
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer
to Warranty Information Book for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air
conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
9
360 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoolefine HFO that is an ozone-saving product. The
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service
be performed by authorized dealer using recovery and
recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
See your Authorized Dealer for service.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch,
release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned
and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades, the windshield, and rear window periodically with a sponge or
soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and
help reduce streaking and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always
use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt
or dirt from a dry windshield or rear window.
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 361
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice
from the windshield or rear window. Make sure that
they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on
to avoid damaging the blade. Keep the wiper blade out
of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil,
gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines, or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
Service Position Strategy
The service position allows the wiper blades to be
placed in a position that allows the wiper blades to be
easily changed.
To enable the Service Position Strategy, the wipers must
be in the Park position before placing the ignition in the
OFF mode.
Service mode must be activated within two minutes
after the ignition is placed in the OFF mode.
To have a correct activation of strategy, the Service
Position command (antipanic) must be active for at least
half a second.
At every valid activation of Service Position command,
the wiper blades are activated for 250 ms.
The Service Position command can be repeated several
times to bring the blades into the desired position, up to
a maximum of three times.
After three subsequent activations the strategy is disabled.
Function Deactivation:
The functionality is reset if:
• The ignition is turned to the RUN mode.
• Number of subsequent activations is three.
• Two minutes timer has expired after cycling the
ignition OFF.
NOTE: When turning the ignition ON, the blades will
go into the parking position.
9
362 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the windshield.
1. Carefully lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the
wiper blade off of the liftgate glass.
2. Push the release button on the arm of the wiper
blade.
2. Grab and hold the wiper arm closest to the wiper
blade end while pushing the wiper blade towards
the liftgate glass to unsnap the blade pivot pin from
the wiper blade holder on the wiper arm.
3. Push the wiper blade up and remove it.
3. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly push
the wiper blade until it snaps into place.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment, and the fluid level should be
checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not engine coolant/ antifreeze). Refer to “Engine Compartment” in this section
for further information.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Button
3 — Wiper Arm
4. Install the wiper blade and firmly push the wiper
blade until it snaps into place.
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 363
WARNING!
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn
you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution.
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in the
“Safety” section for further information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials
might be grass or leaves coming into contact with
your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your
vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside
the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle
is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust
fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change.
Replace as required.
9
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if
your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
(Continued)
364 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
condition. In the event of engine malfunction,
particularly involving engine misfire or other
apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle
serviced promptly. Continued operation of your
vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the
converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is
important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing
the vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• Turn vehicle off and disconnect the fan motor
lead before working near the radiator cooling fan.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 365
WARNING! (Continued)
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away
from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is
raised. The fan starts automatically and may start
at any time, whether the engine is running or not.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly
could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any
coolant is needed to be added to the system, please
contact your local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Coolant Checks
Selection Of Coolant
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in the
“Technical Data” section for further information.
9
366 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT)
engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the engine coolant
and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is
important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT
coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of
your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) that meets the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032.
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 367
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
−34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact your
authorized dealer for assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/engine
coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality
water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection
in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle
is operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant
is needed to be added to the system, please contact
your local authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage.
If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and
refill with OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as
soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze) and to ensure that engine
coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the
coolant recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
9
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never
add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine
is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
368 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze)
is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal.
Check with your local authorities to determine the
disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion
by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycolbased engine coolant in open containers or allow it to
remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean
up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be
between the “MIN” and “MAX” marks.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a
month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed
to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows
no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may
be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing.
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 369
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure
tested for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
a minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs
may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor gas mileage, and increased
emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining
wear, and possible brake damage. Riding the
brakes may also reduce braking capacity in an
emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services, or immediately
if the “Brake Warning Light” is on.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area
before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring
the fluid level up to the requirements described on the
brake fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall
as the brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be
checked when the pads are replaced. However, low
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may
be needed.
9
370 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual
transmission, the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to
both the brake system and the clutch release system.
The two systems are separated in the reservoir, and a
leak in one system will not affect the other system. The
manual transmission clutch release system should not
require fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle.
If the brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system
does not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be
a result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system.
See your local authorized dealer for service.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in the
“Technical Data” section for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in the “Technical Data” section for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during
hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden
brake failure. This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should
be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 371
CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall
clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids
may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of
clutch function and the ability to shift the transmission.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Technical Data” for further information.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The
fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole
and a point not more than 3/16 inch (4.7 mm) below the
bottom of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed
at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary
unless lubricant has become contaminated with water.
NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be
changed immediately.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life.
Use only the manufacturer’s specified transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” 9
in “Technical Data” for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct
level using the recommended fluid.
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be
used.
372 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And
Genuine Parts” in “Technical Data” for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to
the transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer
can check your transmission fluid level using special
service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit your authorized dealer immediately
to have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating
the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause
severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the
proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed
at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for
the life of the vehicle.
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 373
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
Washing
The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu- 9
lated on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch
the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
374 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
• If the engine compartment is washed with an
high pressure jet, keep it at a distance of at least 8
inches (20 centimeters) from filler surface.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads, or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least
once a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear
and open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs
is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or
similar cause that destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the
responsibility of the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are
well packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint
to match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain
their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with
the same soap solution recommended for the body of
the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice
or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge
and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 375
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the
wheel surface.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or
harsh brushes. These products and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of
tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to
prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment
or Mopar Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for
aluminum or chrome wheels. Do not use any products
on Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will
permanently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels with 9
wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes
before doing so. Driving the vehicle and applying the
brakes when stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor
corrosion.
376 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or
Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel
cleaners, abrasives or polishing compounds. They
will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER
WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis;
this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean, or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap
residue.
• For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and
Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking
your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 377
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not
be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Keton based cleaning products to clean leather
seats, as damage to the seat may result.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution
followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the
lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive 9
type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on
the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray
cleaner directly on the mirror.
378 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Instrument Panel Cover
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface
which minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not
use protectants or other products which may cause
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Instrument Panel Bezels
CAUTION!
When installing hanging air fresheners in your
vehicle, read the installation instructions carefully.
Some air fresheners will damage the finish of
painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly
contact any surface.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
clean damp cloth.
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the
fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the
vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
NOTE: If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upper
turning loop for soiling. If soiling is present, clean with
a wet soft cloth until all residue is removed.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 379
WARNING! (Continued)
Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.).
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go
to an authorized dealer or service station.
The vehicle lifting points on the vehicle are marked on
see example shown).
side skirts with symbols (
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
Lifting Point Locations
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction
and Temperature Grades
9
380 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard
have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning
with the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from
this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
Tire Sizing Chart
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15
LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 381
EXAMPLE:
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating
conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)
tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
9
382 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
EXAMPLE:
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including
the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the
tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black
sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is
not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on
the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
• This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety
standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
• 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
• 01 means the year 2001
• Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which
the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 383
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
9
384 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to
the recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
WARNING!
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
• Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling,
and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of
the recommended load capacity for your vehicle.
Never overload them.
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can
result in over-heating and tire failure.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 385
WARNING! (Continued)
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can
cause damage that results in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
9
386 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle.
You will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if
you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold
tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in “Starting And Operating”, or the Tire Information Supplement, located in your Owner’s Information kit.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and
rear axles must not be exceeded. Refer to “Vehicle
Loading” in “Starting And Operating”, or the Tire
Information Supplement located in your Owner’s Information kit, for further information on GAWRs, vehicle
loading, and trailer towing.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount
of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 387
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg, and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The
following table shows examples on how to calculate
total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of
your vehicle with varying seating configurations and
number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate
for the seating and load carry capacity of your
vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
9
388 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling,
and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 389
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING! (Continued)
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
9
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
(Continued)
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
390 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has
not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed
the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide
range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary
with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa)
per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in
mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage,
especially in the Winter.
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 391
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or
conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at
high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure
is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced
vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle
operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe
operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to
the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
9
392 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or
if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6
mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size
and service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation
or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
Use Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 393
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions.
You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe
injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also
creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer
to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states
prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of
inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred
to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when
the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa).
Once a Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode, it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced
immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
9
It is not recommended to drive a vehicle loaded at full
capacity, or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
394 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit”
in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with a compact or limited use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire
damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires should
be replaced.
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 395
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure – Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread
depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the
tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire
should be replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this
section for further information.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle 9
maintenance schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have a collision
resulting in serious injury or death.
396 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
Replacement Tires
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely
affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of
many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures.
The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use
tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and
performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the
paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicator” in this section.
Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or
the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation
of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your
tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire
Safety Information” section of this manual for more
information relating to the Load Index and Speed
Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause
unpredictable handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 397
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
• Only 215/60 R16 and 215/55 R17 tire sizes can be
chained using 9 mm tire chains.
• No other tire sizes can be chained.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a
collision.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe
the following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance
between tires and other suspension components,
it is important that only traction devices in good
condition are used. Broken devices can cause
serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if
noise occurs that could indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the device before
further use.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Front Tires Only.
(Continued)
9
398 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare
tire.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by
the tire’s manufacturer in each category is shown on
the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based
on the wear rate of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear
one and one-half times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics and
climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 399
WARNING!
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does
not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
The temperature grade for this tire is established
for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature
can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all passenger vehicle
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling, and braking functions. For these reasons, they
wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to
maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and
contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
9
400 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid
or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation
being performed.
The suggested Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire rotation
method is the “rearward cross” shown in the following
diagram.
The suggested Front Wheel Drive (FWD) rotation
method is the “forward cross” shown in the following
diagram. This rotation pattern does not apply to some
directional tires that must not be reversed.
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire Rotation
CAUTION!
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Tire Rotation
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type and circumference
on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause
damage to the power transfer unit. Tire rotation
schedule should be followed to balance tire wear.
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 401
STORING THE VEHICLE
If the vehicle should remain stationary for more than a
month, observe the following precautions:
• Park your vehicle in a covered, dry and possibly airy
location the windows open slightly.
• Check that the Electric Park Brake is not engaged.
• Disconnect the negative (-) terminal from the battery
post and be sure that the battery is fully charged.
During storage check battery charge quarterly.
• If you do not disconnect the battery from the electrical system, check the battery charge every thirty
days.
• Clean and protect the painted parts by applying
protective waxes.
• Clean and protect polished metal parts by applying
protective waxes.
• Apply talcum powder to the front and rear wiper
blades and leave raised from the glass.
• Cover the vehicle with an appropriate cover taking
care not to damage the painted surface by dragging
across dirty surfaces. Do not use plastic sheeting
which will not allow the evaporation of moisture
present on the surface of the vehicle.
• Inflate the tires at a pressure of +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar)
higher than recommended on the tire placard and
check it periodically.
• Do not drain the engine cooling system.
• Whenever you leave the vehicle is stationary for two
weeks or more, idle the engine for approximately five
minutes with the air conditioning system on and
high fan speed. This will ensure a proper lubrication
of the system, thus minimizing the possibility of
damage to the compressor when the vehicle is put
9
back into operation.
NOTE: When the vehicle has not been started or driven
for at least 30 days, an Extended Park Start Procedure is
required to start the vehicle. Refer to “Starting The
Engine” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
402 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Before removal of the positive and negative terminals to the battery, wait at least a minute with
ignition switch in the OFF position and close the
drivers door. When reconnecting the positive and
negative terminals to the battery be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the drivers
door is closed.
TECHNICAL DATA
CONTENTS
䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . .404
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
10
404 TECHNICAL DATA
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The chassis number (VIN) and stamped on the plate
illustrated in, located on the left front corner of the
instrument panel cover, visible from the outside vehicle
through the windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The stamp includes:
• Type of the vehicle
• Sequential production number of the chassis
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This number is also stamped on the floor of the passenger compartment, in front of the right front seat.
TECHNICAL DATA 405
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench using a high quality
six sided (hex) deep wall socket.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
89 Ft-Lbs (120 N·m)
M12 x 1.25 x
25.5
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
17 mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Wheel Mounting Surface
10
406 TECHNICAL DATA
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to
be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning
may result in personal injury.
Torque Patterns
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S
Fuel (Approximate)
1.4L Turbo/2.4L Engine
Engine Oil With Filter
1.4L Turbo Engine (SAE 5W-40 Synthetic, API Certified)
2.4L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified)
Metric
12.7 Gallons
48 Liters
4.0 Quarts
5.5 Quarts
3.8 Liters
5.2 Liters
TECHNICAL DATA 407
U.S
Cooling System *
1.4L Turbo Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10
5.5 Quarts
Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
2.4L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
6.8 Quarts
150,000 Mile Formula)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric
5.2 Liters
6.5 Liters
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 1.4L Turbo Engine
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or
equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
We recommend you use SAE 5W-40 API Certified Synthetic
Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12991. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct
SAE grade.
We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil,
meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
10
408 TECHNICAL DATA
Component
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection – 1.4L Turbo Engine
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
91 Octane Recommended, 87 Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol.
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
Chassis
Component
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – If Equipped
Rear Differential (RDM) – If Equipped
Brake Master Cylinder
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar C Series Manual & Dual
Dry Clutch Transmission Fluid.
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct
fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission.
We recommended you use Mopar Front Axle/PTU
Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5).
We recommended you use Mopar Rear Axle/RDM
Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5).
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 4. If DOT 4 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 3 is acceptable.
DOT 4 brake fluid must be changed every 2 years
regardless of mileage.
MULTIMEDIA
CONTENTS
䡵 CYBERSECURITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . .412
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE
DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . .443
䡵 VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS . . . . . . .445
▫ Introducing Uconnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
5.0 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
6.5 NAV Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
▫ Basic Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
▫ Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
䡵 USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
▫ Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . .442
▫ Navigation (6.5 NAV). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .453
▫ Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
11
410 MULTIMEDIA
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks.
These networks allow your vehicle to send and receive
information. This information allows systems and features in your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless communications. Vehicle software technology continues to evolve
over time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may
require software updates to improve the usability and
performance of your systems or to reduce the potential
risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software)
is installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that
may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD)
into your vehicle if it came from a trusted source.
Media of unknown origin could possibly contain
malicious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle
systems to be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized dealer immediately.
MULTIMEDIA 411
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle
owners should:
• Routinely
check
www.driveuconnect.com/
software-update to learn about available Uconnect
software updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept information and private communications without
your consent. For further information, refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel that allow you to
access and change the customer programmable features. Many features can vary by vehicle.
Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons
On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
11
412 MULTIMEDIA
Your Uconnect system may also have Display Off and
back arrow buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Display Off button on the faceplate to turn off
the Uconnect screen. Push the Display Off button on the
faceplate a second time to turn the screen on.
Push the Back Arrow button on the faceplate to exit out
of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect touchscreen.
Uconnect 6.5 NAV Buttons On The Touchscreen And
Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below, and beside
the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument
panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob
located on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
through menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90),
push the center of the control knob one or more times to
select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
5.0 Settings
Push the Settings
button on the faceplate, to display the settings menu screen. In this mode the
Uconnect system allows you to access programmable
features that may be equipped such as Display,
Units, Voice, Clock & Date, Safety/Assistance,
Lights, Doors & Locks, Engine Off Options, Audio,
Phone/Bluetooth, Radio Setup, Restore Settings and
Clear Personal Data.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
MULTIMEDIA 413
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the
desired mode, press and release the preferred setting
and make your selection. Once the setting is complete,
either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen
or the Back button on the faceplate to return to the
previous menu or press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
Up or Down Arrow buttons on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the
available settings.
Setting Name
Display Mode
Brightness
Language
Touchscreen Beep
NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition
in the “RUN” position.
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Auto
+
English
Manual
–
Español
Français
11
414 MULTIMEDIA
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen,
you may select each unit of measure independently
displayed in the instrument cluster display. The following selectable units of measure are listed below:
Setting Name
US
Selectable Options
Metric
After pressing the “Custom” button with “Units” on the
touchscreen, you may select from the following menu
items:
Setting Name
Distance
Fuel Consumption
Pressure
Temperature
Selectable Options
mi
MPG (US)
psi
MPG (UK)
kPa
°C
km
L/100 km
km/L
bar
°F
MULTIMEDIA 415
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Voice Response Length
Show Command List
Selectable Options
Brief
Always
Detailed
With Help
Never
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Set Time & Format
Selectable Options
12 hour
24 hour
NOTE: Press the corresponding arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then select “AM” or “PM.”
Show Time Status
On
Off
Set Date
Up Arrow Button
Down Arrow Button
Sync Time — If Equipped
On
Off
NOTE: When in this display, you may sync the time with GPS.
11
416 MULTIMEDIA
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
ParkView Backup Camera Delay — If Equipped
Selectable Options
NOTE: When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned off), the rear camera mode is
exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
camera delay turned on), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to ten seconds
after shifting out of “REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is
shifted into PARK or the ignition is switched to the off position.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines
— If Equipped
NOTE: When this feature is enabled, active (dynamic) grid lines are overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected back up path based on the steering wheel position. A
dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/
receiver.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guide Lines —
If Equipped
MULTIMEDIA 417
Setting Name
Selectable Options
NOTE: When this feature is enabled, fixed (static) grid lines are overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to
illustrate the width of the vehicle.
Forward Collision
Near
Far
Warning-Plus (FCW+) —
If Equipped
NOTE: The Front Collision Warning (FCW+) feature can be set to Far, or set to Near. The default status of
FCW+ is the Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front
of you when you are farther away. This gives you the most reaction time.
Forward Collision
Warning-Plus (FCW+)
Active Braking — If
Equipped
NOTE: The FCW+ system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). When this feature is selected, it will apply
the brakes to slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision. The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The ABA system
becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h).
ParkSense — If
Sound Only
Sound and Display
Equipped
NOTE: The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in
REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual)
to indicate the proximity to other objects.
11
418 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Front ParkSense Volume
— If Equipped
Rear ParkSense Volume
— If Equipped
Rear ParkSense Braking
Assist — If Equipped
Low
Selectable Options
Medium
High
Low
Medium
High
NOTE: When this feature is selected, the park assist system will detect objects located behind the vehicle and
utilize autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.
LaneSense Warning — If
Early
Medium
Late
Equipped
NOTE: When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which the steering wheel will provide feedback for
potential lane departures.
LaneSense Strength — If
Low
Medium
High
Equipped
NOTE: When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
Blind Spot Alert — If
Off
Lights
Lights & Chime
Equipped
MULTIMEDIA 419
Setting Name
Selectable Options
NOTE:
• When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The
Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode. When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor
(BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors. When Lights & Chime
mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an
audible alert when the turn signal is on. When Off is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.
• If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not
damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification.
Setting Name
Rain Sensing Wipers — If
Equipped
Selectable Options
NOTE: When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses
moisture on the windshield.
11
420 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Headlight Sensitivity
Selectable Options
1
2
3
NOTE:
The greater the sensitivity set, the less the external light variation required to turn on the lights (e.g. with a setting on level 3 at sunset the headlights turn on earlier than in levels 1 and 2).
• Level 1 = minimum sensitivity
• Level 2 = medium sensitivity
• Level 3 = maximum sensitivity
Headlight Off
0
30
60
90
Delay
Greeting Lights
On
Off
Auto High Beams
On
Off
— If Equipped
Daytime Running
Yes
No
Lights
Cornering Lights
On
Off
Flash Lights With
On
Off
Lock — If
Equipped
MULTIMEDIA 421
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Auto Door Locks
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph
(20 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit
On
Off
Flash Lights With Lock
On
Off
Horn With Lock
Off
1st Press
2nd Press
Horn With Remote Start
On
Off
— If Equipped
Passive Entry
On
Off
Remote Door Unlock/
Driver
All
Door Unlock
NOTE: When “Driver” is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock
button, you must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When “All” is selected,
all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button.
11
422 MULTIMEDIA
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Headlight Off Delay
Selectable Options
+
–
NOTE: When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90
seconds when exiting the vehicle.
Radio Off Delay
0 MIN
20 MIN
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Equalizer
Selectable Options
+
–
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as
press directly on the desired setting.
Balance/Fade
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings.
Speed Adjusted
1
2
3
Volume
MULTIMEDIA 423
Setting Name
Surround Sound —
If Equipped
Loudness — If
Equipped
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
Auto-On Radio
Selectable Options
On
Off
Yes
No
On
Off
On
Off
Recall Last
NOTE: The Radio automatically turns on when vehicle is in run or will recall whether it was on or off at last
ignition off.
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Paired Phones
Selectable Options
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement
11
424 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
SXM Tune Start
Selectable Options
NOTE: The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music
channel using one of the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time
the preset is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize
it’s on, except that you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to
play.
Channel Skip
Channel Skip
NOTE: SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to
or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on
the touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Information
Subscription Info
MULTIMEDIA 425
Setting Name
Selectable Options
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with
your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the
Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Restore Settings
Ok
Selectable Options
Cancel
11
X
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will reset all settings to their default settings. To restore the settings to their default setting, press the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen. A pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure
you want to reset your settings to default?”
426 MULTIMEDIA
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Clear Personal Data
OK
Selectable Options
Cancel
X
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data” button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you
sure you want to clear all personal data?”
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
6.5 NAV Settings
NOTE:
Press the Settings button to display the menu setting
screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to
access programmable features that may be equipped
such as Display, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance,
Lights, Doors & Locks, Engine Off Options, Audio,
Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings Defaults, Clear Personal Data and System Information.
• Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings
may vary.
• Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the
desired mode, press and release the preferred setting
and make your selection. Once the setting is complete,
either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu, or press the “X” button
on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.
MULTIMEDIA 427
Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right
side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down
through the available settings.
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Display Mode
Selectable Options
Auto
Manual
NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode
the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control even though the headlights are on.
Display Brightness With Head+
lights ON
Display Brightness With Head+
lights OFF
Set Language
English/Español/Français
Touchscreen Beep
On
feature will cause
–
–
11
Off
428 MULTIMEDIA
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen,
you may select each unit of measure independently
displayed in the instrument cluster display. The following selectable units of measure are listed below:
Setting Name
US
Selectable Options
Metric
NOTE: When US is selected, Distance is set on miles, Fuel Consumption is set on MPG (US), Pressure is set on
psi, and Temperature is set on °F. When Metric is selected, Distance is set on km, Fuel Consumption is set on
L/100 km, Pressure is set on bar, and Temperature is set on °C.
After pressing the “Custom” button with “Units” on the
touchscreen, you may select from the following menu
items:
Setting Name
Distance
Fuel Consumption
Pressure
Temperature
Selectable Options
mi
MPG (US)
psi
MPG (UK)
kPa
°C
km
L/100 km
km/L
bar
°F
MULTIMEDIA 429
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Voice Response Length
Show Command List
Selectable Options
Brief
Always
Detailed
With Help
Never
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Show Time In Status Bar
Sync Time With GPS
Set Day
Set Month
Set Year
Set Hours
Set Minutes
Time Format
Selectable Options
On
On
+
+
+
+
+
12 hrs
Off
Off
–
–
–
–
–
24 hrs
11
430 MULTIMEDIA
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button
on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Forward Collision
Warning-Plus (FCW+) —
If Equipped
Near
Selectable Options
Medium
Far
NOTE: The Front Collision Warning (FCW+) feature can be set to Far, Medium, or Near. The default status of
FCW+ is the Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front
of you when you are farther away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change the setting for a more dynamic driving experience, select the Near setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you are much
closer to the vehicle in front of you.
Forward Collision
Off
Audio
Audio & Brake
Warning-Plus (FCW+)
Active Braking — If
Equipped
MULTIMEDIA 431
Setting Name
Selectable Options
NOTE: The FCW+ system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). When this feature is selected, it will apply
the brakes to slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision. The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The ABA system
becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h).
LaneSense Warning — If
Early
Med
Late
Equipped
NOTE: When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which the steering wheel will provide feedback for
potential lane departures.
LaneSense Strength — If
Low
Medium
High
Equipped
NOTE: When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
ParkSense — If
Sound Only
Sound & Display
Equipped
NOTE: The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in
REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual)
to indicate the proximity to other objects.
11
432 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Front ParkSense Volume
— If Equipped
Blind Spot Alert — If
Equipped
Low
Selectable Options
Medium
High
Off
Lights
Lights & Chimes
NOTE:
• When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The
Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode. When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor
(BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors. When Lights & Chime
mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an
audible alert when the turn signal is on. When Off is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.
• If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not
damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification.
ParkView Backup CamOn
Off
era Active Guidelines —
If Equipped
NOTE: Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows
you to see active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera display whenever the gear selector is put into
REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check
entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear.
MULTIMEDIA 433
Setting Name
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE: When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned off), the rear camera mode is
exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
camera delay turned on), the rear view image will be displayed for up to ten seconds after shifting out of “REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK or
the ignition is switched to the off position.
Rain Sensing Auto WipOn
Off
ers
NOTE: When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses
moisture on the windshield.
Electric Park Brake SerThis feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle owner to utilize a vehicle
vice Mode
integrated, menu driven system, to command the electric park brake retraction, to
service the rear foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers, rotors, etc.).
11
434 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available.
Setting Name
Headlight Sensitivity
Selectable Options
1
2
3
NOTE:
The greater the sensitivity set, the less the external light variation required to turn on the lights (e.g. with a setting on level 3 at sunset the headlights turn on earlier than in levels 1 and 2).
• Level 1 = minimum sensitivity
• Level 2 = medium sensitivity
• Level 3 = maximum sensitivity
Headlight Off De0
30
60
90
lay
Greeting Lights
On
Off
Auto High Beams
On
Off
— If Equipped
Daytime Running
Yes
No
Lights
Cornering Lights
On
Off
MULTIMEDIA 435
Setting Name
Flash Lights With
Lock — If
Equipped
Headlights With
Wipers — If
Equipped
Selectable Options
On
Off
On
Off
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Auto Door Lock
Selectable Options
Yes
No
NOTE: When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of
15 mph (24 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit
Yes
No
Flash Lights With Lock
Yes
No
Sound Horn With Remote Lock
On
Off
Remote Door Unlock
All
Driver
NOTE: This feature will allow you to program your remote door locks to open “All” or only the “Driver” with
the first push of the key fob or grabbing the Passive Entry door handle.
11
436 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Passive Entry
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE: This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to press the key fob lock
or unlock buttons.
Memory Linked To Key Fob — If
On
Off
Equipped
NOTE:
• This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting
the vehicle.
• The seat will return to the memorized seat location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to On)
when the key fob is used to unlock the door.
Sound Horn With Start — If
On
Off
Equipped
NOTE: When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the Remote Start is activated.
MULTIMEDIA 437
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Radio Off Delay
Headlight Off Delay — If
Equipped
Selectable Options
0 MIN
+
20 MIN
–
NOTE: When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90
seconds when exiting the vehicle.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Balance/Fade
Equalizer
Selectable Options
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings.
+
–
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as
press directly on the desired setting.
11
438 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Speed Adjusted
Volume
Surround Sound —
If Equipped
Loudness — If
Equipped
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
Auto-On Radio
Selectable Options
1
2
3
On
Off
Yes
No
On
Off
On
Off
Recall Last
NOTE: The Radio automatically turns on when vehicle is in run or will recall whether it was on or off at last
ignition off.
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Paired Phones
Paired Audio Sources
Selectable Options
This feature shows which mobile phones are paired to the Phone/
Bluetooth system.
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the Phone/
Bluetooth system.
MULTIMEDIA 439
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
SXM Tune Start
Selectable Options
NOTE: The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is
selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it’s on, except that
you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip
Channel Skip
NOTE: SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to
or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on
the touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Information
Subscription Info
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with
your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the
Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
11
440 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings Defaults
After pressing the “Restore Settings Defaults” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Restore Settings
Selectable Options
When this feature is selected, it will reset Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default. Once in the desired mode, press and release
the preferred setting and make your selection.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button
on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Clear Personal Data
Selectable Options
Yes
No
NOTE: When this feature is selected, it will remove personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets.
MULTIMEDIA 441
UCONNECT RADIOS
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows an external device to be plugged
into the USB port or AUX Jack.
Located below the heating ventilation and air conditioning controls is the front USB port and AUX jack.
Refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
external USB support capability.
Center Console USB Port
Located in the center console is a second USB port.
NOTE: Depending on vehicle configuration, the USB
port may be charge only, or media file capable.
11
Front USB Port And AUX Jack
1 — AUX/ Jack
2 — USB Port
Center Console USB (Charge Only) Port — If Equipped
442 MULTIMEDIA
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located at the
rear of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/
AUX/Media Player, etc.) and can also be used to
select/enter an item while scrolling through menu.
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are
in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation
in each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of
Steering Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the
rocker switch will increase the volume, and pushing the
bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have
programmed in the radio preset button.
MULTIMEDIA 443
Media Mode
Regulatory And Safety Information
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the selected media (USB, Bluetooth). Pushing
the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning
of the current track, or to the beginning of the previous
track if it is within eight seconds after the current track
begins to play.
USA/CANADA
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES
Under certain conditions, an “on” mobile device in your
vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile device antenna. This
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio
performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the
radio volume be turned down or off during mobile
device operation when not using Uconnect (if
equipped).
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless
radio is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure
limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in
such a manner that the radio is 8 inches (20 centimeters)
or further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific
community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy
emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. 11
However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in
some situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the
wireless radio.
444 MULTIMEDIA
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user
is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one
or more of the following measures:
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician
for help.
MULTIMEDIA 445
VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Key Features:
Introducing Uconnect
• Five-inch Color Touchscreen Display with AM/FM/
USB/Bluetooth
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands
and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0
or 6.5 NAV system.
• Bluetooth with integrated voice control
Uconnect 6.5 NAV
Uconnect 5.0
11
446 MULTIMEDIA
Key Features:
• 6.5-inch Color Touchscreen Display with AM/FM/
USB/SD Card/Bluetooth
5. You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button and
saying a Voice Command from current category.
• Bluetooth with integrated voice control
• GPS navigation (if equipped)
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with
your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device
and feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text
2 — Push To Begin Radio, Navigation, Or Media Functions
3 — Push To End Call
MULTIMEDIA 447
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Cancel to stop a current voice session.
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands.
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 6.5 NAV
11
Uconnect 5.0
448 MULTIMEDIA
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or
SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would like to
hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio
trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM.
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1.
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, press the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you
with a list of commands.
Uconnect 5.0 Radio
Uconnect 6.5A NAV Radio
MULTIMEDIA 449
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB Port, Bluetooth
and Auxiliary Ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is
only available for connected USB and iPod devices.
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth.
• Change source to iPod.
• Change source to USB.
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits;
Play song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical.
Uconnect 5.0 Media
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see
all of the music on your iPod or USB device. Your Voice
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
song and genre information is displayed.
11
Uconnect 6.5 NAV Media
450 MULTIMEDIA
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility
and pairing instructions.
. After the beep, say one of
Push the Phone button
the following commandsѧ
• Call John Smith.
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts.
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number).
Uconnect 5.0 Phone
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number).
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the
and say “Call,” then pronounce the
Phone button
name exactly as it appears in your phone book.
When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you
can say “Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect 6.5 NAV Phone
MULTIMEDIA 451
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push
the Phone button
and say “Listen.” (Must have
compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
the Phone button
. After the beep, say: “Reply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep,
repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow
the system prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in traffic.
See you later.
Start without
No.
I’ll be late.
me.
Where are
Okay.
I will be
you?
<number>
Are you there
minutes late.
Call me.
yet?
I’ll call you
I need
See you in
later.
directions.
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost.
Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take
advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone iOS6 or later sup- 11
ports reading incoming text messages only.
452 MULTIMEDIA
Navigation (6.5 NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time
and become more productive when you know exactly
how to get to where you want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
the beep, say:
. After
• For the 6.5 NAV Uconnect System, say: “Navigate
to 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
After the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
.
Uconnect 6.5 NAV Navigation
MULTIMEDIA 453
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Getting Started
Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select
media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your
natural language to understand what you mean and
will respond back to confirm your requests. The system
is designed to keep your eyes on the road and your
hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you perform
useful tasks.
Ensure Siri is enabled On Your iPhone.
To enable Siri push and hold, then release the Uconnect
Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel.
After you hear a double beep you can ask Siri to play
podcasts and music, get directions, read text messages
and many other useful requests.
1 — Select Settings On Your
iPhone
2 — Select General
3 — Select Siri
4 — Enable Siri
11
454 MULTIMEDIA
1. Pair your Siri enabled device to the vehicles sound
system.
NOTE: A push and release of the
button will start
normal embedded VR functions. The push and hold,
button will start Siri functions.
then release of the
2. After the double beep, begin speaking to Siri.
Examples of Siri commands and questions:
• ⬙Play Rolling Stones⬙
• ⬙Send text message to John⬙
• ⬙Read text message from Sarah⬙
• ⬙Take me to the nearest coffee shop⬙
NOTE:
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Phone Pick Up Button
2 — Voice Recognition/Siri Eyes Free Button
3 — Phone Hang Up Button
• Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead to ensure your command is
understood.
• Siri is available on iPhone 4S and later.
MULTIMEDIA 455
General Information
Additional Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
© 2017 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related
marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Uconnect System Support:
• U.S. residents call 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7
days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com
• Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca
• Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
• Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
• Sun., Closed
11
INDEX
12
458 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . .366
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . .189
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . .178
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Air Bag Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134, 208
Air Bag Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . .357
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 360
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . .359, 360
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 359
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
All Wheel Drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . . .365, 406
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148, 149
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Audio Systems (Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .96
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . .227, 371, 372
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372, 408
Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371, 408
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . .114
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
INDEX 459
Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137, 358
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156, 369
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156, 369
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356, 357
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207, 266
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316, 379
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) .343
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . .200
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
LATCH Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Locating The LATCH Anchorages . . . . . . . . . .198
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . .196
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . .193
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Cleaning
12
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
460 INDEX
Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . .441
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Console, Floor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365, 368
Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367, 368
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . .365, 406, 407
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Cruise Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152, 153
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Door Ajar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Door Locks
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .
Electric Park Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Brake Control System
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . .114
. . . . . .218
. . . . . .218
. . . . . .157
INDEX 461
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . .236
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . .141
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316, 379
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . .343
Engine
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207, 266
Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355, 406, 407
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356, 357
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356, 406
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . .340
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207, 266
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207, 363
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Exterior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70, 210
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 360
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357, 407
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 12
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73, 151, 210
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
462 INDEX
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . .407
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Fuel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262, 407
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . .
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline, Reformulated . . .
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Select Lever Override
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.263
.262
.263
.225
.332
General Information . . . . . .
General Maintenance. . . . . .
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . .
Gross Axle Weight Rating . .
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.247
.355
.377
.275
.274
.269
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Headlights
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . .72
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Heated Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch. . . .72
Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
INDEX 463
Hitches
Trailer Towing
Holder, Coin. . . .
Holder, Cup . . . .
Hood Prop . . . . .
Hood Release . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.277
.117
.118
.106
.106
Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Interior And Instrument Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Interior Appearance Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Jacking Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Jack Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316, 319, 379
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
Key Fob
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Key Fob, Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Keyless Enter-N-Go
Enter The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40, 435
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . .40, 435
Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Unlock From The Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Unlock From The Passenger Side . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Unlock Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Lane Change And Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 12
LaneSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
464 INDEX
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134, 208
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152, 153
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . .142
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . .145
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73, 151, 210
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . .151
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . .142, 343
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223, 371
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Frequency Of Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
INDEX 465
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .4, 13
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Placard, Tire And Loading Information. . . . . .384, 385
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . .114
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 12
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel). . . . . . . . . . . .262, 407
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355, 407
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357, 407
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356, 406
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356, 357, 406
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
466 INDEX
Radio Frequency
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .29, 31, 35, 46
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Rear Window Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Reminder, Lights On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . .442
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features . . . .34
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Safety Defects, Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . .172
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . .174
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
INDEX 467
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Seat Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165, 208
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . .172
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165, 167, 169
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47, 48
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Service Assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Shifting
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Side View Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73, 151, 210
Snow Chains (Tire Chains). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 214
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 12
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Steering
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
468 INDEX
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . .442
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Stuck, Freeing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag. . . . . . . .178
Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC). . . . . . . . . .96
Tilt Steering Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Time Delay, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Tip Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . .384, 385
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210, 389, 398
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384, 389
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316, 379
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316, 379
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384, 386
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379, 389
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Towing Eyes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
INDEX 469
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . .285
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Trailer Weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Transfer Case
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227, 371
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73, 151
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Uconnect
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . .34
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . .
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uconnect Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.435
.435
.435
.445
.398
.441
.262
.171
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269, 386
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Vehicle Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4, 13 12
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
470 INDEX
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102, 104
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Windshield Wiper Blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Wipers, Rain Sensitive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Wrecker Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
2017 FIAT ® 500X
2017
17FB-126-AE
©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
FIAT is a registered trademark of FCA Group
Marketing S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC.
OWNER’S MANUAL
Fifth Edition Rev 1
Printed in U.S.A.
FIAT 500X
®
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
2017 FIAT ® 500X
2017
17FB-126-AE
©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
FIAT is a registered trademark of FCA Group
Marketing S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC.
OWNER’S MANUAL
Fifth Edition Rev 1
Printed in U.S.A.
FIAT 500X
®
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising